Top Banner
Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 1 The Usui System of Natural Healing Training Manual for Level 3 Reiki - Master & Teacher Written and Compiled By Carol Macrae Carol’s School of Usui Reiki Mob: 0413346637 E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.carolmacrae.com USUI SHIKI RYOHO
168

USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Apr 30, 2021

Download

Documents

dariahiddleston
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 1

The Usui System of Natural Healing

Training Manual for Level 3 Reiki - Master & Teacher Written and Compiled By

Carol Macrae Carol’s School of Usui Reiki

Mob: 0413346637 E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.carolmacrae.com

USUI SHIKI RYOHO

Page 2: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 2

Page 3: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 3

Usui Shiki Ryoho The Usui System of Natural Healing

Usui Reiki Training Manual

Level 3 -— Shinpi Den

Master and Teacher

Including Non-Reiki Material

Written and Compiled by

Carol Macrae

Carol’s School of Usui Reiki Suite 21, 69-79 Macquarie St, Dubbo, NSW, 2830

Ph: 0413346637 E: [email protected] W: www.carolmacrae.com

Page 4: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 4

Dedication This manual is dedicated to Master Mikao Usui and all those who have come before him and

after, who have walked the path of truth through the gift of healing and enlightenment.

To my Parents who have taught me how to live this truth through honesty, integrity, humility, dignity and respect, I owe you much.

To my husband Kim, my children Sarah, Scott & Nicholas, and my grandsons Cooper and

Paeton, who share my life and encourage me to attain my spiritual and personal goals, while walking this earthly path. Thank you for the lessons of this lifetime and the love we share as our

common bond. Thank you for choosing me to be a part of your journey!

To my students who have taught me so much through this work, and to God, the co-creator of all that is. Thank You to ALL for your love and support.

Copyright All material contained in this manual is the culmination of thousands of hours of

research, typing, collating and printing.

This Manual is a work in progress. As new information comes to hand, the manual is upgraded. First printed 1999. 16th Edition December 2020, Copyright © 1999

All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without permission from the Author.

The Reiki Level 1, Reiki Level 2, Reiki Master/Teacher and Seichim Level 1 and

Master Level Notes are copyrighted©.

This material is for the purpose of training students in the healing arts. Only those who have trained directly under the author may use these notes to teach their students.

Where notes are used as a training aid, reference must be made to the origin of the

material and it’s author.

It is my wish that those who undertake the Master Training in Reiki and Seichim use their knowledge and skills for the betterment of mankind. Please share your Reiki and Seichim with

all those in need, to help make this a better world for all. Namaste.

Carol Macrae can be contacted at: Carol’s School of Usui Reiki

Suite 21, 69-79 Macquarie St, Dubbo, NSW, 2830.

P: 0413346637 E: [email protected] W: www.carolmacrae.com

Page 5: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5

Usui Shiki Ryoho

Level 3 - Shinpi Den

Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52

Title Page and Original Precepts 5 Strengthening Your Reiki Energy 56

The Reiki Principles and Precepts 6 Non-Traditional Reiki Add-Ons 59

Introduction to Reiki Master/Teacher

8 Reiki Symbol Meditation 60

Kanji 9 The Hui Yin and The Violet Breath 61

Reiki History 12 The Microcosmic Orbit 62

Reiki Gakkai Presidents 16 Manifesting Goals 64

Summary of Usui Reiki Lineage 18 Reiki Crystal Grid 64

About the Symbols 20 Reiki Guide Meditation 65

The Master Symbol 21 Reiki Psychic Surgery 66

The Raku 23 Reiki Aura Clearing 67

Tibetan Reiki Definitions 24 Reiki Healing Attunement 68

Traditional Reiki Third Degree Symbols

24 Reiki Tibetan/Usui Attunement 69

Reiki Attunements 25 Antahkarana 71

Hand Positions 27 Notes from Mrs Takata’s Classes 73

Traditional Usui Reiki Attunement Process

28 Japanese Reiki from Hiroshi Doi 87

Passing Reiki Attunements by Direct Intention

32 Non-Reiki Symbols 93

Distant or Remote Attunement 33 Spirit Releasement & Protection 99

Semi-Traditional Attunement (Diane Stein style)

35 Reiki Glossary 113

Additional Attunement Ideas 35 Pictures of Usui, Hayashi & Takata 121

The 21 Day Cleansing Cycle 36 Cheat Sheets for Attunements 127

The Exchange Issue 37 Pictures of Symbols 130

Our Philosophy 39 My Reiki Master Students & more 137

Reiki Ethics for Professional Practice

39 Interesting Photos 140

Teaching Reiki 41 A Letter to You 159

Reiki Class Format Suggestions 43 Bibliography & Suggested Reading 162

Reiki Meditations 49 Notes 164

Page 6: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 6

Reiki and Seichim Master and Teacher’s Workshop

Course Outline

Day 1

• Registration at 9am sharp.

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• Introduction to Reiki Master Course and discussion of why you are doing Reiki Master training, what you hope to achieve, and how you will put your new knowledge into practice.

• Questions and answers from Reiki 1 and 2 and other experiences.

• Revision of Level 1 & Level 2 symbols and introduction to the Master Symbols and uses.

• Morning Tea

• Meditation

• 1st attunement for Reiki Master (repeat of Level 1 and Level 2 attunements to ensure your channel is prepared and in harmony with Master attunement energy)

• Lunch Break

• 2nd attunement for Reiki Master

• The Reiki attunement process for all levels.

• Homework. Read over manual and practice doing an attunement for Level 1 and 2. Day 2

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• Demonstrate and practice doing Reiki Level 1, 2 and Master attunements on each other.

• Morning Tea and discussion

• Seichim Discussion.

• Attunement for Seichim Master (and Seichim Level 1 if not already attuned)

• The Seichim Attunement process and practice

• Lunch Break

• Reiki and Seichim attunement practice.

• Reiki Treatment Practical using all symbols.

• How to teach a Reiki Class

• Revision of all material.

• Questions and answers

• Presentation of Certificates and Photos

• COMPLETION!

Page 7: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 7

USUI REIKI MASTER AND TEACHER LEVEL THREE MANUAL

Japanese Kanji for Reiki

This is intended to be a simple practical manual for Usui Reiki Level Three.

No manual will ever be complete; there will always be more to learn.

The Original Usui Reiki Precepts

The Secret Method of Inviting Blessings. The spiritual Medicine of Many Illnesses.

For today only anger not, worry not. Be Grateful and humble

Do your work with appreciation. Be kind to all.

In the morning and at night, with hands held in prayer,

Think this in your mind, chant this with your mouth.

The Usui Reiki Method to change your mind and body for the better

~ Mikao Usui ~

Page 8: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 8

Reiki Precepts Just for Today, I let go of Anger

Just for Today, I let go of Worry Just for Today,

I Count my Many Blessings Just for Today, I do my Work Honestly

Just for Today, I will be Kind to my Neighbour and Every Living Thing

Additional Reiki Principles 1. There must be a change in consciousness

for healing to occur.

2. There must be an appropriate exchange

of energy, one that honours each. Note: This change in consciousness must occur on the Spiritual Level first. We must understand why we have attracted dis-ease or allow it to penetrate all other levels of Be-ing: the Spiritual (first), then the Emotional (generally suppressed into the liver), the Mental (suppression flows from the liver into the mental processes), and finally the Physical manifests as a cry for help in the form of dis-ease in the body itself. The study of Reiki teaches us that there is no need for physical dis-ease if we pay attention to our spiritual needs. Disease is a catalyst for spiritual growth. The difficulty might be the ability for one to transcend the ego’s resistance to change.

The Soul speaks to us through our body. First we get a tap on the shoulder, then a punch in the arm, and then our legs are kicked out from under us, so that we MUST take note of what our Soul needs us to address. What is our Soul trying to teach us through this illness or dis-ease? What consciousness or thoughts do we need to change, in order for us to move towards our Dharma or Purpose for Life? For Reiki to work, we need to have an open accepting heart, free of ego, judgement and fear. We must be willing to change. One must learn to heal the self first, through daily Reiki treatments and addressing our issues in life. We must move to a place of love and acceptance of the self and others, without placing conditions or judgements upon outcomes. Open your mind and your heart to ALL possibilities. Don’t limit God!

This is how we grow and evolve as Spiritual Be-ings. This is how we heal. As a Reiki Practitioner, you are a channel for the Universal Life-Force Energy known as Reiki.

Page 9: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 9

You are not solely responsible for the healing process of another. Reiki works through a partnership between Healer and Healee. Reiki works as a catalyst to first help the client heal the Spiritual (though awakening the consciousness), then the Emotional, then the Mental, and finally the

Physical. The Reiki Master’s (or Reiki Practitioner’s) job is not to create co-dependence, but to empower the student or client to take full responsibility for their own healing process and their own life. The client must be willing or ready to move beyond the ego, and open the heart to love and the

possibility of miracles.

In life we get what we expect to get! We must re-examine our thought and behaviour patterns and decide whether they still work for us. If they do, then keep them. If not, it’s up to YOU to change

them. You are the thinker behind the thoughts. You can decide which thoughts you give energy to, and which thoughts you let go of, which thoughts you bless and dismiss. If we keep thinking the same thoughts and doing the same things, we will never get anything different. It is only through changing our thoughts and actions, our beliefs about ourselves, that we can change our outcome

and our world.

To be a successful healer, we must all learn to transcend the years of negative programming and fear-based thought patterns. We must learn compassion and loving kindness towards the Self and

others! We must value ourself and know that we deserve love, prosperity and abundance in all areas of our lives. We must take a risk and learn to trust in life and love, with faith that everything

always works out for our highest good. To know that we are indeed Spiritual Being living this Human existence so that we can re-discover who we really are. Let Reiki help you to open up to a world full of infinite possibilities. Step out from your comfort zone, your belief systems; take a risk, a leap of faith. What have you got to lose? Let down the barriers and open your Heart to your own healing process. Only then can we hope to help others by being a living example and allowing others to

follow in our footsteps.

We cannot change others we can only change ourselves. Healing the Self is our First Priority. If we can’t change the situation, we must change our attitudes towards it. Through daily treatments,

meditation, taking care of our Spiritual, Emotional, Mental and Physical bodies we move closer to this objective.

As we strive to become true Reiki Masters, we are still only infants. We have mastered only the

basics. Reiki is the real Teacher. Every time we use Reiki it teaches us something new. We let go of the ego and become the Student once more. Through humility and a willingness to release our

judgement and need to control the outcome, we find that we stop limiting the Energy and allow it to transcend our human limitations. Through Reiki we find that we are more able to see the Universal

Consciousness, and know that we are all ONE. What affects one, affects the whole.

Reiki teaches us to respect all living things. To reach out a helping hand to our fellow man, and offer LOVE to all, unconditionally, knowing that what we put out comes back to us many times over. As Reiki Teachers and Practitioners we must strive towards wholeness, but forgive ourselves for our human limitations. It’s OK to make mistakes; we just have to learn from them! Honour what serves

you in this life. Find your own truth. Listen to everything, but make your own mind up as to what works for YOU! Don’t be afraid to try something different, stay open to ALL possibilities.

As a new Reiki Master you will find your own truth, and will add your own human qualities that make “Your Reiki” individual and unique. Trust in your own intuition

and judgement. There is no “wrong” or “right”, only different. Adding your own personality and style will make you a very special Reiki Master and Teacher, and you in turn will attract different clients and students that will benefit from what you

alone can give them from your heart. You make a difference! The only way we can help heal this world is to learn to love ourselves fully, and

share that love with others. This is the true secret of REIKI!

Namaste- My Spirit Honours Yours ~ Carol Macrae

Page 10: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 10

Introduction to Reiki Master/Teacher Level 1= Sho Den, Level 2 = Oku Den, Level 3= Shinpi Den

This is a Master Teacher Manual for the level three Usui system of Reiki. (Traditional and contemporary Reiki.) The Reiki Master/Teacher (Level III) consists of learning the Master Symbol, receiving the attunement, and learning attunement processes.

There is often some discussion and teaching about ethical spiritual and social issues that might be of concern to Reiki Masters. The Class will also address some of the practical methods of teaching Reiki to others, and some thoughts about manual writing and class organisation. When this class is completed and after the attunements have been received the student will be a Reiki Master and Teacher and will be able to pass Reiki Attunements for all levels of Reiki using either ritual methods or the direct intention transmission of the Reiki attunement. Some masters will only teach those people who are willing and able to completely dedicate their lives to Reiki. I feel that Reiki and other energy work systems should be widely available to people who sincerely wish to learn to use them. However, I feel that the Reiki Master Course should only be taught to those who have mastered and healed the main issues of their life, and have a clear vision and direction. They should be grounded, have a positive outlook on life, and be able to lead a good example of how to live your life in harmony with the self and others. They should also have a genuine wish to help others to heal and travel on their journey with peace and love toward their fellow man. It is also thought that the Reiki Master chooses his students wisely, and is guided by intuition, receiving 3 signs as to whether the student is ready. This is an individual thing, and so you, as a new Reiki Master, must make your own decision as to who you feel is ready to become a Reiki Master, when the time is right.

Many Reiki practitioners want to take the Master level to complete their Reiki training. There is no way to complete your spiritual development and personal evolution. This is an ongoing process. This is a new beginning for sharing Reiki with others. Take this opportunity to enhance your personal growth, develop, and to learn more about yourself, human beings, and the true nature of your existence. Take this as an opportunity to make a difference!

Naturally some of the material in this manual will be familiar to you from your previous study of Reiki, however there is always new information coming to hand, so you may find some changes to your original courses and knowledge.

This manual has the dual purpose of teaching the Master student the material you need to know to become a Reiki Master and reviewing and presenting information and procedures to be taught to your students.

I am happy to provide you with this manual on CD or disc, so that you may use it in your future teachings, but also so that you may make changes as new information comes to hand. Please feel free to use what you wish, and to personalise these notes, as you so desire, as long as you do so with good intention, and with the highest good of your students in mind.

Being A Reiki Master does not mean you are better or wiser or more enlightened than anyone else it just means that you have a genuine interest in helping to bring Reiki to those in need, are able to transfer the ability to transmit Reiki attunements to others. I feel that a Reiki Master should make an effort to live in an ethical way and to be responsible for their actions and intentions.

This manual includes traditional Usui Reiki, attunements and the knowledge to pass them to others. I emphasise that strongly because due to Reiki variants with differing numbers of attunements there is occasionally some confusion about what is to be taught in a particular class.

Page 11: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 11

Some teachers teach a Reiki 3a or personal Master level between Reiki 2 and the teaching level. Some of these classes only teach the use of the empowerment symbol for personal use and healing and others will teach a number of non-traditional techniques but 3a usually does not teach how to pass attunements for all levels or how to teach a class.

This may seem like just a way to get more money out of a student. I usually just teach the complete system in three levels. Some people do wish to have the use of the empowerment function in healing without wanting to teach others. This is usually because of a specific healing need among their family and loved ones, or they may want an intermediate stage between Reiki two and Reiki Master/Teacher before they decide if they wish to practice as a Reiki Master. Some non-traditional elements that are often added in 3a classes might include: meditation techniques, a Healing Attunement, the Hui Yin, the Violet Breath, Psychic Surgery, Reiki Crystal Grids a Meet your Reiki Guide Meditation. Some of these are touched on in the Reiki Two Manual that is included with this Master training. The reality is that most "3a Master Practitioners" are Reiki Masters who simply have not been taught an Attunement Process. Although most of the 3a material is not traditional Usui Reiki, I will include some of it in this manual. Feel free to experiment with it if you wish, but remember, Reiki is Reiki! You do not need add-ons for it to bring about miracles in your life or those you share your Reiki with!

Although Mrs Takata taught the Master Training in ONE weekend and charged $10,000, I usually teach the Master’s Workshop over 1 or 2 weekends if there are larger classes, because there is so much more we now include in the course and want to give students more time to take in all the information. I also recommend that you assist in a Reiki Level 1 and 2 Workshop before teaching Reiki so you can observe and gain more experience in preparation for your own classes.

The Reiki Precepts

Just for today I let go of anger

Just for today I let go of worry

Just for today I give thanks for my many blessings

Just for today I do my work honestly

Just for today I will be kind to my neighbour and every living thing.

The Reiki Principles are the heart of Reiki. The only real mastery is self-mastery. Usui taught that dedication to the principles and living them was essential. The real intent of the principles was to bring about enlightenment, peaceful living, kindness toward all, calm in your mind, and in your life. The principles embody compassionate living. They embody the Buddhist principles of Karuna (compassion toward all beings) and Metta (loving kindness to all). Humility, gratitude, non-anger, non-worry, and kindness. In healing ourself, living the principles, we find true mastery. Not mastery of Reiki, but mastery of ourselves.

The Reiki Kanji (characters) The kanji characters Rei and Ki both have an old and a modern form. The old form Kanji (written by Usui and Takata Sensei') best describes Reiho, rediscovered by Usui Sensei. The word Reiki with a capital “R” is the word, which describes the energy of this system. The old style kanji is the form that is currently used by the Radiance Technique and some independent Reiki Teachers.

The old form kanji as written on the precepts by Usui Sensei, best describes the system known as Reiho. It is easily explainable as follows:

Page 12: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 12

The Old Form REI

Rei – Strokes, 24. Consists of 3 parts. Top is rain, middle is things and bottom is Shaman. Rei means "spirit or spiritual". The Japanese dictionary defines Rei as: (1) Spirit; the spiritual aspect of the human being as contrasted to the physical. (2) Divine, numinous, charismatic, supernatural, mysterious. (3) The luminosity of the spirit; the luminosity of a God or Sage. (4) Inconceivable spiritual ability; charismatic power; charisma; wonderful; a wonder. (5) A rainmaker, a diviner; a person or being with spiritual or

supernatural powers. (6) A shaman. (7) Goodness; good, excellent, efficacious. (8) Clever, nimble, sharp. (9) Life. (10) A living being; a human being. (11) A supernatural (mythical) beast or being; a fairy, an elf. (12) Pure, undefined, unpolluted. (13) Bright, clear.]

KI

Ki – Strokes, 10. Consists of Breath with rice (Rice in Japan is sometimes used as a synonym for people). Ki means "energy". The Japanese dictionary defines Ki as: (1) Vital energy connected with the breath. Invisible life-force, somewhat equivalent to the Indian prana. (2) In the view of Zhuxi and other Neo-Confucians, the material force of the Universe. The generative forces of heaven and earth, by means of which all things are constantly reproduced. (3) Air. (4) Breath, steam.

Description of the old form Reiki Kanji: On the earth stands a shaman with his arms raised against the sky. From the heaven the rain comes down with lifesaving energy consisting of 3 parts, Light, Love and Wisdom. The shaman acts as a channel (channelling this energy down to all the people of the Earth). The Reiki teacher is the channel when s/he initiates students and the practitioner is the shaman, when s/he channels this spiritual energy to the people treated.

New Kanji and its description from the dictionary. The meaning of the new form kanji from a Japanese dictionary is, 'aura'.

The new form kanji does not adequately give an accurate description of Usui Sensei's Reiki Ryoho:

Rei - Strokes, 15; (1) soul; spirit; departed soul; ghost

Ki - Strokes, 6; (1) spirit, mind

Page 13: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 13

Page 14: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 14

Reiki History

The Traditional Reiki Story in the west comes from Hawayo Takata's teachings. The traditional story is that Dr Usui was teaching in a Christian University called Doshisha University in Kyoto in the mid 1800's. His students began to ask him if he believed that Jesus' could heal as in the bible. When he replied that he did, they asked him to perform such healing so they might believe as well. Dr Usui did not know how to heal. He began to question church leaders, who also did not know how this was accomplished. So he set out on a quest to learn of these methods. As the story goes, he travelled through Japan, China, studied at the University of Chicago Divinity School and eventually came back to Japan.

According to the story, Usui had failed to find this great healing and so Dr Usui climbed Mt Kurama for a 21-day meditation and fasting ritual. At the end of the 21 days when Usui was about to leave, he saw a great light approaching him from the distance. He was fearful, but he stayed. The light struck him in the forehead (third eye). This knocked him unconscious, but upon awakening, he saw millions of small glowing bubbles and the Reiki symbols were shown individually to him. The meaning and application of each Reiki symbol was then apparent to him.

Dr. Usui was then supposed to have healed his toe on the way down the mountain, as well as a girl, and then eaten a full meal after a 21 day fast. He began healing beggars in the slums of Kyoto. He found that those that he had healed would return again for treatment of the same illnesses. Usui found that many of these people held their illnesses and diseases because they served them as useful. These people preferred to live with their illness, because they were cared for by others, and for various other reasons. It was then that Usui felt that treatment must include not only the physical, but also the emotional and spiritual. Usui also decided not to do Reiki for free after this, and that some form of energy exchange must occur, to teach the lesson of gratitude.

Recent by Dave King, Frank Petter, William Lee Rand and others have revealed new information regarding Dr. Usui and the discovery of Reiki. Mikao Usui was born August 15th, 1865 in the Yamagata district of Gifu prefecture in a village called Yago. Usui studied Buddhism at the school and temple on Mt. Kurama as a child. It is also thought that he may have studied a Japanese form of Chi Kung and other oriental healing systems. Most stories of the History describe Usui as scholarly, and that he was a bright and hard working student. Usui was a successful businessman. Around March, 1922 he went to meditate at Mt. Kurama, and underwent a 21 day period of meditation and fasting. During this 21 day meditation the Reiki Energy entered his crown chakra. He discovered that he had received a great gift of healing. He knew that unlike his Chi Kung exercises, which could deplete his own personal energy, this Reiki Energy would heal without draining him.

He treated his family and friends, and felt that as it worked so well on them, he should share it with the public, so he then spent several years in Kyoto. He opened a school in Aoyama, Tokyo in April 1922, where he trained students in his Usui Shiki Reiki Ryoho. It is thought that he trained about 2000 students to the practitioner levels and sixteen to teacher level. He died on March 9, 1926. His story is engraved on this Memorial at his grave site in Tokyo, which stands 10 foot high and 4 foot wide.

Usui himself founded a Reiki Society. Mikao Usui was the first President of the organisation, which he called Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai. Usui died in 1926. There have been six presidents of the Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai since Usui's death. None of them were Dr. Hayashi. None of them

Page 15: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 15

called themselves "Grand Master" or lineage bearer. Usui was succeeded in order by Mr Ushida, Mr Takatome, Mr Wantanabe, Mr Wanami, Mrs Koyama, and the current President Mr Kondo.

In the western tradition, it is commonly thought that "Grand Master" Usui passed on the lineage to Dr Chujiro Hayashi. This is not true, although it was Hayashi who was commissioned by Dr Usui to create the formal hand positions due to his medical experience, and Hayashi who was also asked to develop the Attunement process we now use in the West.

Dr Chujiro Hayashi was made a Reiki Master in 1925 and was a student of Usui. Dr Hayashi was a retired Captain and Surgeon from the Japanese Navy. He left the Reiki Gakkai due to the increasing military nature, as many of the succeeding Presidents were in the Navy. Hayashi opened a Reiki clinic, which was more along the lines of a medical model.

Dr. Hayashi suggested a simple cleansing technique (from Qigong or Kikou origins) called Kenyoku-ho to prepare the practitioner before each healing. He was asked to write some kind of procedural material and he introduced a Ryoho Shishon or healing guide for applying Ki to various body parts depending on the injury or illness. Eventually these would become part of a booklet the URR Gakkai would give to their new students. It was called Usui Reiki Hikkei.

Dr Hayashi made some modifications in the system and developed the 12 standard hand positions in use in the west today. These hand positions allowed Reiki to be given by several practitioners at once. This group healing technique was used in his clinic and it was believed this maximised the flow of Reiki to the patient, and sped up the treatment time.

In Hayashi's clinic, Students would work in his clinic treating the sick for a period of time in exchange for learning Reiki I. Those who were talented and dedicated healers were taught Reiki II, in exchange for a longer period of service and training. The most dedicated were taught Reiki III. One of Hayashi's Masters was a Japanese American woman, living abroad in Hawaii, Mrs Hawayo Takata.

Mrs Hawayo Takata was born in 1900 on the island of Kauai in Hawaii. Her parents were Japanese immigrants. She married and had two daughters. Her husband died in 1930. Approximately 5 years later, she developed severe abdominal pains, lung problems and subsequent nervous conditions. She returned to Japan to visit family, and to receive medical treatment. According to Mrs Takata, she was found to have a tumour and appendicitis. While on the operating table, she reported that she heard a voice tell her that the operation was not necessary. She asked the doctor if there was another way her problems could be healed. The doctor told her about Dr Hayashi's Reiki clinic, and she decided to go there. She received treatments at Dr Hayashi's clinic. Mrs Takata wanted to learn Reiki and requested that Dr Hayashi teach her. He eventually agreed to teach her. In 1936, Mrs Takata received her first degree in Reiki. At the end of a year of training she received her Reiki II. She went back to Hawaii and began to practice Reiki. In 1938, while Dr Hayashi was visiting Hawaii, he initiated Takata as a Reiki Master. She was the thirteenth master initiated by Dr Hayashi. Her certificate, notarised on February 21, 1938 gave her the status of a Reiki Master and authorised her to teach the system. Mrs Takata initiated 22 masters. Most of these 22 Masters are alive and still practicing and teaching Reiki today.

At some point the Reiki system taught to Takata from Hayashi changed. The system became three levels from the 6 used in the Gakkai and most of the spiritual practices (that are now being rediscovered as they are released from Japan) were missing. It is unclear as to why this was done. It is unknown if she was not taught them by Hayashi, or if they were dropped because Westerners could not understand them. In any case, there were not passed along to the vast majority of practitioners in the west. Perhaps this is why so many people attempted to add spiritual practices from Tibet and other places in an attempt to "fill in the gaps" that they perceived were missing. Reiki in this Hayashi - Takata Tradition is most appropriately called Usui Shiki Ryoho.

Page 16: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 16

After the death of Mrs Takata, Reiki in America split into two main schools. They are the Radiance Technique founded by Barbara Weber Ray, and the Reiki Alliance founded by Phyllis Lei Furumoto (Takata's granddaughter) and the remaining Masters of Mrs Takata. Phyllis began to claim as time went on, that she was now the "Grand Master and Lineage Bearer" of Reiki. The Alliance and its members acknowledge Phyllis Furumoto as the current "Grand Master" and "lineage bearer" of Reiki. While Mrs Furumoto is certainly the current head of the Reiki Alliance, and of the

lineage of Usui-Hayashi-Takata, which brought Reiki into the United States and much of the world, there clearly exists no Grand master designation that Usui passed onto anyone.

Reiki has evolved substantially since the time of Takata's death in the western world. Reiki has spread throughout the United States and Europe, and India. Many masters have added or taken away some techniques and modified the teachings. Some have added Tibetan Techniques, Chi Kung, Wicca, New Symbols and whole new styles have been created. There are now styles such as Raku Kei Reiki, Vajra Reiki, Blue Star Celestial Reiki, Karuna Reiki, Seichim Reiki, Tera Mai Reiki, as well as several non-traditional Usui Variants. The vast majority of practitioners are Independent Reiki Masters.

Mikao Usui discovered Reiki in Japan in the early 1900’s. That part of the story is irrefutable. Until recently the story we had available to us in the west was incomplete. Thanks to the efforts of people like Frank Arjava Petter, Dave King, Hiroshi Doi, Andy Bowling, Rick Rivard and others, much more is now known about Reiki here in the West. The history provided by Hawayo Takata in the West had some historical inaccuracies in it. Others have added all sorts of other beliefs and suppositions presented as truth that need to be addressed here as well.

The reality seems to be that there are no records that Usui was ever at the Doshisha University as either a student or teacher. Likewise there is no record of him ever at the University of Chicago, and the Divinity School at U. of C. did not exist until some time later. It is possible that these were embellishments that Takata added to make Reiki more palatable to the westerners she taught.

In the Takata history, Usui made Dr Hayashi Grand Master of Reiki, prior to his death in 1926. Additionally, it was taught that Reiki was no longer practiced in Japan. After Mrs Takata's death the Reiki Alliance formed, headed by her grand daughter Mrs Phyllis Lei Furumoto. Mrs Furumoto has made claims regarding that she is the "lineage bearer" and the Grand Master of Reiki.

I do not mean to imply that Mrs Takata was misleading those of us in the west. Mrs Takata and the gift she gave to the west cannot and should not be underestimated or undervalued. Mrs Takata was a Japanese woman who was trying to communicate cultural ideas and beliefs to westerners. Anyone who has visited other countries and lived there for any time will appreciate how much there is unwritten and unspoken in daily life. Mrs Takata used stories, tales and other mediums to communicate Reiki to her students. Some of these were taken dogmatically and are codified in some "Traditional" Usui Shiki Ryoho schools in the west. Some things were misunderstood as people tried to apply new age thinking and philosophy that they were familiar with, thinking that was what was being taught them. Some of the stories seemed to be totally misinterpreted, like the story of the beggars which was not meant to justify high training costs or "energy exchanges" but to teach that some people choose not to heal and change.

It is only now with the Reiki Ryoho material coming from Japan that we can see what the intent was and how the system changed. My appreciation for Mrs Takata and her simple teachings grows more and more.

Page 17: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 17

The recent historical research shows that it is now apparent that after discovering Reiki, Usui founded a Reiki Society. Usui was the first President of the organisation called Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai. Sensei Usui died in 1926 and was succeeded by a Mr Ushida, followed by a Mr Takatome. The next presidents in order were Mr Wantanabe, Mr Wanami, Mrs Koyama, and last, the current President (as of 1998) is a Mr Kondo. Mr Hayashi was made a Reiki Master by Usui but there is not evidence that he was a member of the Gakkai. There are currently other Reiki lineages in Japan from Hayashi's students as well as from other off Usui's students. It is now readily clear that there was never a "Grand Master" or lineage bearer in Usui Reiki. This would seem to be in contradiction of western stories and lineages that indicate that Mr Hayashi was made Grand Master, which he then passed to Mrs Takata and then to Mrs Furumoto. What now seems fairly clear is that Dr Hayashi was a well-respected disciple of Sensei Usui, of which there were 16, but Hayashi was not made the lineage bearer or Grand Master.

Therefore Mrs Takata could not have been "Grand Master" nor could her grand daughter, Mrs Furumoto. That being said, I have been a Facebook friend of Phyllis for many years till her death in 2019, and found her to be an amazing, honourable and humble teacher who upheld the highest standard of the Reiki Principles and the Essence of Reiki.

Did Reiki Come from Tibet?

The other area in which the Reiki History has been questioned is in the area of Reiki that existed prior to Usui finding it. Although this energy has existed forever, and is in my opinion a gift from God available to all, it is still uncertain as to the prior existence of this type of healing system. It was previously stated that Reiki predates Usui's discovery and is in reality from Tibet. The earliest statements regarding this appear to come from Arthur Robertson's work in Raku Kei Reiki. Raku kA incorporates the Hui Yin, the Breath of the Fire Dragon (Violet Breath technique) and other Tibetan practices. In Tibet there are the somewhat similar arts of Jinlap Maitri, Medicine Buddha, and the Green Tara Empowerments.

There is also a major path of study of Mahayana and Vajrayana Buddhism, where these symbols are openly discussed and far from secret. The symbols’ healing uses were considered incidental to their spiritual value. The Reiki symbols are supposedly Sanscrit-derived Japanese forms, at least 2,500 years old. One Buddhist nun (as mentioned in Diane Stein’s book, Essential Reiki) recognised the symbols, and felt that the variations were cultural. She felt that one set of symbols were to her like an attempt to transfer the Sanscrit into Japanese. She identified them clearly, knew their names and the concepts each invoked.

However, Usui states in his own words, in the Usui Reiki Hikkei (Usui Reiki Manual given to his students) that, "My Usui Reiki Ryoho is an original; it's nothing like this in the world. So I would like to release this method to the public for everyone's benefit and hope for everyone's happiness. My Reiki Ryoho is an original method based on intuitive power in the universe. By this power, body gets healthy and enhances happiness of life and peaceful mind." Going on he states that, "I've never been given this method by anybody nor studied to get psychic power to heal. I accidentally realised that I have received healing power when I felt the air in mysterious way during fasting. So I have a hard time explaining exactly even I am the founder. Scholars and men of intelligence have been studying this phenomenon but modern science can't solve it. But I believe that day will come naturally."

From Usui’s own words, Usui states that his art is original and like nothing else in the world. He does not mention Tibet, Lemuria, Atlantis, Guides, Jesus, Buddha or anything else.

This would seem to contradict claims that Reiki has roots going back well over 2,500 years, as well as those that speculate that it is the same healing system used by Jesus, Krishna, and the Buddha. I have even seen the claim that Jesus ventured into Tibet and India and learned Reiki from Tibetan Masters. Still others claim Reiki is from Egypt, Atlantis, and even from Lemuria over 100,000 years ago. Tibet has several touch healing systems, none of which are Reiki and it is inappropriate to call them Reiki.

From this we would assume that Reiki is a system that was discovered by Mikao Usui, and turned into a medical model by Dr Hayashi. While many people have developed touch healing energy systems, they are not Reiki.

Page 18: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 18

Others have channelled information and "discovered" that Reiki was in Ancient Egypt, Atlantis and Lemuria. While these are interesting theories, there is nothing in the historical records of ancient Egypt that there was ever anything like Reiki. Atlantis and Lemuria, while the subject of great interest, took their secrets with them when they were destroyed. Others state that since Usui discovered Reiki by reading the Sutras, it must therefore have been a Buddhist art that predated his discovery of it. Since countless millions have read the Diamond and Lotus Sutras and not ever seen anything that described Reiki or discovered Reiki, It should be safe to assume that the sutras, while they may have been a great inspiration, were not the source of Reiki.

In all likelihood, Reiki was a combination of several different arts and techniques that existed, and was in practice during Usui's lifetime, which he then combined, after receiving a Satori (enlightenment). Morihei Tanaka was alive at the time and in the same general area teaching his Dai Rei Do and his system used Rei Shi Jitsu or Universal energy to heal. My information also indicates that this school used Reiju as their empowerment process. Reiju was the original process to empower students that evolved into attunements in the western systems of Reiki. (It was also rumoured that Usui had studied with Tanaka but that cannot be confirmed.) Another school developed at this time was called Omoto Kyo. This was developed by Onisaburo Deiguchi. His practices used eating healthy food and diet and energy healing. Deiguchi's system was further developed by Mokichi Okada who developed Sei Kai Kyu Sei Kyo, better known as Johrei and as the Johrei Fellowship Worldwide. Johrei also uses Reiju to empower its followers. Finally, Ki Ko was the Japanese practice of Chi Kung. Ki Ko techniques were widely known in Japan and found their way into many systems including Aikido, which was developed around the same time, that Reiki was. Techniques such as hatsurei ho and other practices in the original Usui system were obviously from Ki Ko. It is most likely that Reiki evolved from these and other practices in Japan that Usui learned and studied.

Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai Presidents

From the view point of the actual society presidents, here is a table showing the leaders' time in office and their date of transition. Note that Taketomi served 2 terms. According to Doi-sensei, this was because after the war there was some concern about having the military seeming to be in charge. So Watanabe stepped in for a brief term as president.

Mr. Mikao Usui - 1865-1926 Honorary

Mr. Juzaburo Ushida (Gyuda) -Navy Rear-Admiral (Shouja) Shinpiden from Usui Sensei

- 1865-1935 President 1926-1935

Mr. Kan'ichi Taketomi -Navy Rear-Admiral (Shouja) Shinpiden from Usui Sensei

- 1878-1960 President 1935-1946(?) 1947(?)- 19??

Mr. Yoshiharu Watanabe

-School Teacher Shinpiden from Usui Sensei

- 18??-1960 President 1946 (?)

for 8 months

Mr. Hoichi Wanami -Navy Vice Admiral (Chujou) Shinpiden from Ushida-sensei

- 1883-1975 President 19??-1966

Page 19: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 19

Ms. Kimiko Koyama

(resigned Jan. 17, 1998) Shinpiden from Taketomi-sensei

- 1906-1999 President 1966-1998

Mr. Masayoshi Kondo

chairperson since Jan. 17/98) -University Professor Shinpiden from Wanami-sensei (Ms. Makino is vice-chair)

- 1993? President 1998 -

Mrs. Kimiko Koyama- the past president f Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai, 1906 - December 3, 1999

Page 20: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 20

SUMMARY OF THE USUI LINEAGE

1. Dr Mikao Usui- Rediscovered Reiki around 1922, during a mystical experience (1865 – 1926) on Mt Kurama (Mt Kuryama)

2. Dr Chujiro Hayashi- One of Dr Usui’s 16 Masters. Founded a clinic in Japan. Developed (1878 – 1940) the standard hand positions and divided Reiki into Levels 1, 2 & 3.

3. Mrs Hawayo Takata- Learnt Reiki form Dr Hayashi and was one of his 13 students. (1900 - 1980) Mrs Takata brought Reiki to the West.

Your Lineage

4. Beth Gray- One of Mrs Takata’s 22 Masters. Initiated between 1970 and 1980 and spread Reiki to the rest of the world.

5. Denise Crundall- Beth Gray’s Student

5. Also William Rand- William has also taken Reiki from Diane McCumber, Marlene Schilke, Harry Kuboi, Bethel Phaigh and Phyllis Furumoto

6. Zetta Michaels Merilyn Bretherick (10) 7. Carol Macrae 1999 8. YOU My Reiki Masters Your Reiki Master

Page 21: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 21

Summary of the History of Reiki

? 2,500 Years Ago Tibetan Monks and Practitioners

1. Dr Mikao Usui- Rediscovered Reiki, March 1922 during a mystical experience ( 1865 – 1926) on Mt Kurama.

2. Dr Chujiro Hayashi- One of Dr Usui’s16 Masters. Founded a clinic in Japan. Developed (1878– 1940) the standard hand positions and divided Reiki into Levels 1, 2 & 3.

3. Mrs Hawayo Takata- Learnt Reiki form Dr Hayashi and was one of his 13 Masters. (1900-1980) brought Reiki to the West. Your Lineage 4. Beth Gray- One of Mrs Takata’s 22 Masters. Initiated between 1970 and 1980 and spread Reiki to the rest of the world.

5. Denise Crundall- Beth Gray’s Student

5. Also William Rand- William has also taken Reiki from Diane McCumber, Marlene Schilke, Harry Kuboi, Bethel Phaigh and Phyllis Furumoto

6. Zetta Michaels- My Reiki Master

7. Carol Macrae- Your Reiki Master

8. YOU- This workshop is the start of a life long opportunity to practise, apply, contemplate, live, honour, choose and love working with Reiki / Life Force Energy.

Your Other Lineage 4. Iris Ishikura– 1973-1980. One of Mrs Takata’s Masters 5. Arthur Robertson– 1982 6. Jeanie Sande– 1982 7. Judith Tripp Chasin– 1992 8. Anna Khan Isis– 1993 9. Shirley Britton– 1997 10. Merilyn Bretherick– 1998 – My Reiki Master 11. Carol Macrae– 8th July, 1999– Your Reiki Master 12. YOU –

Page 22: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 22

About Symbols There are at least three fundamentally different types of symbols and beliefs regarding the nature of symbolic forms. The first kind of symbol is those in which the power or ability to create effect is inherent in the form of the symbol. Those used in sacred geometry or the Tattwas and to a certain extent Yantra Mandalas are among those in which the actual shape or form is said to directly stimulate the subconscious energy patterns in the brain and energy body or physical and non-physical reality.

These symbols are said to contain the power to awaken ability, create a result or convey mystical information and realisation of themselves with no or little action or intention by anyone. The second belief is that objects and symbols can be something that is charged or empowered by intention or ritual or proximity to holy places or people to contain the power to create an effect. The last kind of symbol is those that are tools or triggers which enable you to connect with and use a spiritual function, information, energy and so forth, that exists separate from the symbol itself. The symbol is more like an on button the power is in what the symbols represent rather than having any power of its own.

Some people have considered and taught that the Reiki symbols and their names or mantra themselves inherently contained the power and were sacred and secret not to be revealed to anyone who was not an initiate. Most of the Symbols used in Reiki are Kanji, that is, written words, which have esoteric symbolic meanings in some Buddhist traditions.

I have always felt that the Reiki symbols were primarily of the third kind. They are tools to facilitate connecting with aspects of the universal energy for healing. They do not themselves have power. There are often many different ways to draw a particular symbol but they all effectively assist in connecting to the Reiki energy. Now that Western Reiki Practitioners have made contact with Japanese Reiki Practitioners from the Reiki Association founded by Mikao Usui it is apparent that this is the way they are used in that society and that many people become able to use Reiki functions without directly invoking the symbols.

These symbols are exactly that, symbols. They are not what they represent. The Reiki symbols represent specific properties, functions of energy for healing and spiritual enhancement. When anyone who is attuned to Reiki sees and says the name or draws these symbols it helps them to connect themselves with the Reiki energy and activate the function and specific purpose the symbol represents.

Direct intention activation does not substitute for the information and experience to be gained from studying and using symbols. It is not necessary to understand the meanings of the symbols or even to consciously use them to gain and share the benefits of the Reiki system. Though it can enrich your experience to explore the meanings. The symbols remind us that there are ways to focus on different aspects of the energy and use them.

You may also use Reiki to focus on other aspects and purposes of the universal energy by direct intention. Other systems, which have evolved from Reiki, such as Seichim and Karuna, use different symbols to focus on other aspects of the energy. However you can use Reiki for these functions without further attunement and with or without the use of the additional symbols.

In the Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai, (which is the Reiki society founded by Usui Sensei) we understand that it is taught that the symbols were added by Usui sensei sometime after his realisation of Reiki. This was in order to help those people who had little experience in energy work, or who needed help connecting with energy.

The symbols were apparently selected from those terms used in some esoteric Japanese or Buddhist sects that are appropriate for the function of the Reiki focus. Many more books and translations of Reiki teaching from Japan will be published in the future so our historical information about Reiki will continue to expand. Reiki is not a closed system. While we benefit by having a sound background in traditional Reiki practices, Usui Sensei gave symbolic indication of his hope that the system would continue to develop after his passing.

Page 23: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 23

The method of becoming attuned to the ability to use Reiki has changed over the years from the way it was and is practiced at the Japanese Reiki society. In the Reiki Ryoho in Japan, you would meet weekly with fellow members and a master, have a lesson or lecture and possibly practice and or receive healing treatments. After this you would do the Hatsurei Ho meditation during which the master would give you and the other members "Reiju" an empowerment which helps to connect and deepen your connection to Reiki energy, gradually in accord with your personal development. Possibly after a period probably of a year or more of this practice and study you might be invited to learn the second teachings.

In the Hayashi-Takata lineage called Usui Shiki Ryoho the symbols are of more importance. The system was set up to teach Reiki faster than the lengthy training in the original Reiki Ryoho. There was more emphasis on symbols and hand positions so that students could connect to Reiki, in order to work in the Hayashi clinic before they developed the ability to sense the energy of clients. This is also probably why an attunement process was developed, similar to the initiations used in many healing and spiritual traditions, to greatly accelerate the clearing and connection, and the ability to work with universal energies. The Masters that Mrs Takata trained were taught with this emphasis on the symbols and were also sworn to secrecy about the Reiki symbols and other practices.

THE MASTER SYMBOL

Dai Ko Myo- Empowerment Dai Ko Myo (dye koo myo, (mm yoh long o). Empowerment, Intuition, Creativity and Spiritual connection. This is the master symbol or energy function used for activating the initiation and attunement to Reiki. This is the only symbol added in traditional Usui Reiki during the Master training. There are a couple of additional symbols that are not originally part of this system that many teachers have added and we will discuss them later.

Dai Ko Myo can be translated as "The Great Shining Light" or "the Treasure Tower of Light". In some Buddhist practices it is symbolic of "Mystic Law” or one's "Buddha Nature" and of states of enlightenment, and is sometimes used in esoteric Buddhism as a metaphor for the essential spiritual truth or laws of the universe. It can also refer to the senses, the human body in enlightenment, the teachings of all enlightened masters. These may be traditional meanings separate from

Dai Ko Myo as a Reiki symbol.

Dai Ko Myo enables recognition and clarity about your true path. There is less written about this Reiki symbol and function than about the others in the context of Reiki because until quite recently there have been very few Reiki Masters who are empowered to use it. It is still somewhat unexplored. Mrs Takata drew the symbols differently for many of her students. The first three symbols were compared and one form for each was selected after her death. This was not done with the DKM so there are many different versions, which you might encounter. They all work. DKM activates a powerful energy for Self-Empowerment and is used for opening Spiritual connection and intuition, and for cellular healing. Once you are attuned to this energy you can use it for treating yourself and others each time you activate Reiki. It is said to work at the cellular and genetic levels and is valuable for treating Migraine Headaches. Many people have found that the Level Three Reiki Attunement increases the intuitive and psychic awareness that they can comfortably access.

Page 24: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 24

I have heard this called the vocational or life purpose function because it often seems to initiate dramatic changes in career and lifestyle. It is also used as a 'manifestation energy' by some, as is Cho Ku Rei the power boost from second degree Reiki. To use DKM for manifestation you activate this energy and clearly visualise what you intend to manifest. This will not bring you things that are not in accord with your higher self and soul purpose.

The diagram of DKM as shown, is the way I was taught, however, I believe that the horizontal stroke in DKM is more correctly drawn as the first stroke and the strokes shown as 1 and three in the first example is really a single stroke 2.

The Dai Ko Myo is known as the Master Symbol. This is the function or energy that the Reiki Master activates to do the Attunements that make the Reiki energies permanently accessible to the new practitioner. Some Reiki Masters teach a non master IIIa attunement that activates the Dai Ko Myo as the spiritual and intuitive energy tool but supposedly does not confer the ability to do attunements. In many cases it probably does, but the student is not taught how to do attunements.

The translation of Japanese Reiki Master Hiroshi Doi's explanation of this symbol, Dai Ko Myo, Empowerment, Characteristics of the 4th symbol - Symbolises the entire Universe. The highest symbol in Reiki-ho, for activating the 7th chakra.

The meaning and functions -

1. The whole universe is made of vibration/light. The 4th symbol has the function of transmitting subtle vibration of love, healing and harmony for all beings by resonating with conscious energy in a higher dimension.

2. This is considered to be a very sacred symbol and given the highest expressions like ''God inviting symbol'', ''The symbol for guiding spiritual awakening''. But the symbol has its value in the function of connecting to sacred being and becoming part of it. The source (higher dimension) represented by the symbol is honourable but the symbol itself is just a tool."

The different concepts illustrated by different Buddhist sects using Dai Ko Myo as a metaphor, do include sacred but not secret ideas. They are about spiritual reality and Universal Laws, such as Love, Light and Harmony, and the proper function of all the senses in perfect fusion with spiritual essence represents the complete body of Universal Law and wisdom. I feel that these "mystic law" aspects of the DKM may have contributed somewhat to the idea of the symbols themselves as sacred and secret. I will share the symbols discretely when I feel it appropriate, but naturally do not want to disrespect it or display it outside of its contexts of healing and Spiritual law. Dai Ko Myo is for all purposes of Reiki function with or without the other symbols.

The spiritual bodies effect the physical body. Healing at the Master level is thought to directly effect the higher spiritual body template and can lead to immense transformation and healing on all levels of being and possibly at times, Miracles.

It is taught in many paths that all disease comes from blocks forming in the energy body. Reiki treatment will help remove these blocks, free stagnant energy, restore energy to depleted areas and improve the function and stability of the energy body. This contributes to physical healing and emotional, mental and spiritual wholeness. I use the Usui Dai Ko Myo constantly. It calls in a complete range of the most positive energy frequencies possible in each specific situation. It can also be used to clear away negativity and as a protective symbol. One focus of this symbol is the healing of the soul. The physical body reflects the condition of the spiritual body, and one can often effectively heal disease at its causal root, or spiritual level, with Dai Ko Myo.

Page 25: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 25

Symbol Represents Purpose Meaning

Cho Ku Rei

Body Increase Power "Put the power here" or "God is here"

Sei Hei Ki Mind Emotional, purification, protection, clearing

"Key to the universe" or "Man and God becoming one"

Hon Sha Zei Sho Nen

Spirit Distant healing, Akashic Records, past-present-future

"The Buddha in me reaches out to the Buddha in you to promote enlightenment and peace"

Dai Ko Myo Master Passing attunements Reiki mastership; "man+woman+universe = whole energy"

Raku- The Lightning Bolt

This is not a traditional Usui Reiki Symbol, but I was taught this symbol to use in attunements. I believe that it comes from Tibetan Reiki. It’s use is optional.

Raku (rah koo) is another added symbol that is often used to end attunements (and sometimes to begin them) I have heard that Buddhist and Shinto Priests use this symbol as a gesture to end rituals, so believe it was probably adapted from these for use with Reiki. Raku is only used in attunements. One of my Reiki Masters used the Raku, and the other didn’t. I was taught the version on the left, but have seen the version on the right. Feel free to experiment. I suggest you try both with and without, and see what you think.

Tibetan Buddhist Definitions of the Five Symbols The five Reiki symbols are the five levels of mind. Together they are the non-duality of mind and object and the emptiness from ego that achieves the highest level of the end of the Path of Enlightenment (Buddhist nirvana). Once achieved, this releases the Be-ing from the wheel of incarnation.

The symbols’ original use was not for healing (worldly) but Enlightenment to help others—five levels of wisdom that culminate in Enlightenment.

Cho-Ku-Rei: Beginning or entrance, generation stage. Placing the mandala into the heart. Meditation until there is no difference between the meditation and the world. Emptiness- non-attachment from the Earth plane. The first step, the first experience. (Reiki definition, the light switch.)

Sei-He-Ki: Earth (and the person in incarnation) are considered to be impure ground. Impure ground (yellow) is purified by wisdom to gold- purification, transmutation, alchemical change from dross to gold. This is Enlightenment which few achieve (Buddha status), by realisation of the emptiness of the self. Purification by the fire of wisdom to

gold/purity. (Reiki definition, emotional healing, purification, cleansing protection.)

Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen: No past, no present, no future. Freedom from delusion and karma (karma defined as the action of the mind). The mind creates time, space, limitation, and delusion. Enlightenment is going beyond the mind to the Buddha Nature (God or Goddess within) in all of us. When the mind is aware, there is openness and release: freedom from time, space, delusion, and limitation. Dissolution of limitation means understanding all things. (Reiki definition, healing past/present/future, healing karma, distance healing).

Page 26: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 26

Dai-Ko-Myo: "The one with the Mahayana heart of giving" or "Temple of the great beaming light." The person who has the desire for Enlightenment for others’ sake and will achieve it. He/she realises that great unification is the basis for understanding all things. (Oneness, You are God/Goddess.) When he becomes enlightened, he is freed from incarnation and suffering. In Buddhism, this is the only real healing. (Reiki definition, healing the soul.)

Raku: Completion, achievement of lower nirvana, emptiness of self of existence. The appearance of an image of the Buddha (God/Goddess) within the self. Freedom, Enlightenment, total peace. Release from the illusion of the material world, release from the body and incarnation, total healing. In Buddhism, this symbol is used in the direction from feet to crown to take one out of the body. In Reiki it is used from crown to feet for grounding and to draw the energy from the universe into the body (opposite intent and meaning- Reiki is the worldly uses for the symbols, Enlightenment is the

spiritual and Buddhist use. Buddhist thought makes the body and healing irrelevant). (Reiki definition, the lightening bolt, completion, grounding.)

Attunement = Initiation = Empowerment

Traditional Reiki Third Degree Symbols Although some people have been taught that symbols are to be kept secret it has been found that to many Japanese students, this is not the case. All the traditional symbols are now known to be derived from other sources in Japanese culture, and can be found in their spiritual books or temples. However, they may not have had any energy associated with them (or perhaps a different type of energy) in their original form. In fact, several are not symbols but Japanese phrases.

In August 1999, Japanese Reiki Master Horoshi Doi explained that in the Original Reiki Society, the symbols are no longer used. They may be shown for their historical value, but students are expected to simply use the energy they are given in empowerments at Okuden and Shinpiden level. Usui Sensei and the society actually would only share additional energies and techniques (Okuden) if you could demonstrate your abilities to sense disease in the body. Then it was felt you could appreciate the additional skills. Today in the Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai (the original society) you can wait up to 10 years before you are allowed to receive Okuden (I understand this will soon be decreased). At this point, if you are still unable to demonstrate the required abilities, you are then granted Okuden more as an honorific.

The Society explains that Usui Sensei first introduced the “symbols” as a form of training wheels for some students. Sensei discovered that some students were unable to accept that the energies they received beyond the Reiki energy could be transmitted just by will. And so to assist one student with distant Reiki, he had the person focus on an old Buddhist mantra, which Dr Hayashi came to teach as the Connection energy. This eventually spread to the other 3 main energies shared by Sensei as well. Sensei obviously drew on his previous research in order to provide an appropriate mantra or symbol. Doi-San points out that even training wheels can get in the way after awhile as you improve your abilities, for they may come to inhibit your progress, (e.g. how fast can you travel or turn corners?) He acknowledges that in the west, many may have sought to have bigger and more impressive training wheels, although he recognises the use and importance of personal symbols.

In Dr Hayashi's more structured form of Reiki, Usui Shiki Ryoho (Usui Method of Healing), the use of the symbols seemed to become solidified into a standard part of the training. If at any point they were later de-emphasised, Mrs Takata did not pass this on in the west. Thus the symbols grew in importance along side the energy they convey.

Page 27: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 27

We are taught that the Reiki symbols are sacred. I have learned that people are sacred, not symbols. The symbols (which act as yantras or a visual focus) and their mantras or names (which act as an audio focus) are simply aids to concentrate on when you wish to connect and work with specific vibrations or frequencies of energy. In some energy disciplines I have learned, once the student knows the energy they wish to connect to, simply thinking of the energy creates the connection or awareness. This can be true of Reiki symbols.

ALTERNATIVE MASTER SYMBOLS

Because there are now many different forms of Reiki which have evolved, some Reiki Masters choose to use one of the non-traditional Reiki Master Symbols. While all symbols work, it is recommended that even if you choose to use one of the alternative symbols, when teach Reiki to Students, it is important to stick to tradition as much as possible, if you are teaching the workshop as Traditional Usui Reiki.

Dai Ko Myo- Traditional Usui form Dumo- Tibetan Reiki Form Dumo- Karuna Reiki Form

Reiki Attunements How Attunements Work

During the Attunement the Reiki Master intends that the recipient- attunee be connected to the energies and that they be able to access the energies. The recipient intends to accept attunement to Reiki.

It is the intention of the Master that confers the ability to use the Reiki functions rather than the drawing of the symbols within the sphere of the aura.

You can think of all attunements as being like tuning in a radio (or programming the VCR). It may be more accurate to say that the Reiki Master lets the installer in and holds the toolbox while the work is done.

Many teachers refer to placing symbols in the aura. I often find that it is not putting things into the aura that is the issue, but getting unwanted things out. Almost everyone can and does create energy forms, and thought forms. These forms can block the natural flow of energy and do need to be removed. Some times during an attunement you may see or feel forms being removed. Old shields around the heart, which prevent emotional involvement, seem to be quite common.

Page 28: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 28

The Attunement Process

The degree of ritual and ceremony accompanying Reiki attunement varies from almost none to major productions involving smudging with sage, chanting, bell ringing, drumming, speaking in tongues and great formality.

I use a fairly standard ritual attunement technique and will share this and several different versions of attunements that you can choose from or adapt.

It is a well kept secret that whatever ritual or ceremonial form you use to conduct the attunement it will work, provided your intention is set and the recipients accept the attunement. The structure you use should be one that is appropriate and comfortable for you and your students.

During the attunement it is intended that the recipient- attunee be connected to the energies, and that they be able to access the energies by using the symbols or by intention. The intention of the Master connecting to the flow of Reiki confers the ability to use the Reiki functions, rather than the actual ceremony or drawing of the symbols in the aura. Your class and your attunement should have a clear beginning, middle and end.

Reiki attunements are usually passed during a ritual. This manual contains several variations of attunement rituals. Attunements allow us to access energy functions that it would otherwise take many years of practice to be able to use. It is believed that originally Usui would take on a student who would study with him for an extended period of time (sometimes up to 10 years in the current Japanese System). They would travel and assist with healing, and over a period of time, the energy would be transferred, initiating the student into Reiki. Usui later changed this to a formal attunement process using meditation, chanting and other esoteric techniques so that the attunement process could be done more quickly, and to many students at once.

In the West, this process has been formalised more, and has developed to use specific placement of the symbols into the aura. Although I have seen several different methods, the intention is what is important. We must remember to let go of judgement if we are to be true to the Reiki precepts and ideals. If it works for you, then it’s right for you.

Before the Attunement

Many Reiki teachers will clear and/or charge the energy of the room with Reiki before the students arrive and the class begins. If it is part of their own personal path they may have invited angels, ascended masters, guides, Reiki Masters past, present and future, placed a healing grid or gateway in the room and so on, to support the most complete and perfect class and attunement possible. They might have said prayers or done meditation or a self-treatment with Reiki in accord with their own path of practice.

In any case the Reiki teacher should have the intention to conduct the most complete and suitable class for their participants, and to attune and teach the students to be fully competent practitioners at the level of the class training they are participating in.

The invocation may be done before the class, just before the Attunement, or both. Some Reiki Masters perform elaborate opening rituals before the attunement such as casting a circle, or smudging with sage, toning and chanting. These are not required or part of Usui Reiki.

It now seems that Usui Sensei may have joined his students in reciting the Reiki principles and singing some inspirational poems together before classes. This seems to be a pretty common practice in varied Japanese cultural activities including spiritual, social events, work and cooking, art and music lessons.

Firstly, see to everyone's comfort and assure that they have chosen to come to the class to be attuned and understand what will be taking place during the class.

Generally the first attunement is done or begun fairly early in the class, after some discussion because much of the instruction, symbols and practice are easier to learn after the attunement than before.

Page 29: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 29

You should explain what might be experienced during the attunement. Offer some preliminary information about attunements in general and explain what the specific attunement will do. Remind everyone that they need to accept the attunement willingly and that the attunement will make them permanently able to connect with and use Reiki at their level of the attunement.

You might want to have a break for a drink, snack or lunch before the attunement so participants won't be distracted by hunger or thirst and certainly everyone should have a chance to use the rest room before you start.

If you are doing a traditional attunement you may wish to decide if you will take each person into a separate area one at a time. Or you may have them seated in a line, working on the back of everyone, then moving to the front, then moving to the back to complete the attunement. If doing a direct intention attunement you will probably be attuning everyone at the same time. You might want to play some music and light some incense or oil.

Special Hand Positions The following hand positions may be used at the commencement of your Reiki treatment if you wish. I was also taught to use Kanji #1 at the commencement of the attunement process, so I have included these positions here for you as an option.

The Kanji Hand Positions:

Kanji Position #1

Two index fingers placed together - spiritual healing - distant remission of disease. Beneficial for self. Before you do any type of Reiki healing always assume Kanji position #1. A brief meditative state holding Kanji #1 brings spiritual energy into your channels.

Kanji Position #2

Two Middle fingers placed together. If during a balancing/healing session you want to increase the efficiency of hands-on, do Kanji #2. Kanji #2 increases the energy factor as it flows through your channels.

Kanji Position #3 –

For Second & Master Level

Fingers folded inward toward palm. Brings a knowing. A connection to the client's subconscious/conscious mind. Go into a meditative state and assume position #3. It assists you in connecting with imbalances within the client.

Page 30: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 30

The Traditional Usui Reiki Attunement Process The beginning and end of each attunement is the same, but there are differences for each

attunement in the middle section. I have written the attunement process as one, with the start and end the same, but have separated the different attunements and levels in the middle section.

The attunement procedure is a ceremony of spirit. In this ceremony the Reiki Master uses the Reiki symbols and other gestures in a prescribed way. This ceremony creates an energy pattern around the recipient of the attunement, which attunes their energy field to the energies represented by the symbols. The attunement is permanent, thus making the recipient a Reiki practitioner.

Preparation and positioning for the attunement:

Position initiate in straight chair with feet flat on the floor. If feet do not touch, use a phone book, cushion, or whatever is necessary under the feet so that the initiate is seated in a comfortable position. Standing in front of the Initiate (with hands either in Kanji #1 Position, or stretched out shoulder height, palms facing the students), explain that you will be walking around to the back and working on his/her head then returning to the front to work with his/her hands. While demonstrating the correct position, instruct initiate to bring his/her hands together in prayer position and hold them comfortably. Also tell him/her that you will be touching hands as well as raising them higher during the attunement.

• Introduction – “This is your 1st attunement (2nd, etc) for 1st Degree Reiki (2nd, Reiki Master, etc). This is a sacred event using Universal Life Force Energy. Please relax, making sure your back is straight, feet apart on the floor, and hands on your legs. In a moment I will get you to place your hands in prayer position in front of your heart. During the attunement I will be working from the back and the front. When I place my hand on your shoulder I would like you to bring your hands up over you head in prayer position… (Demonstrate). I will also be blowing through your chakras from the front like so… (Demonstrate). Now I want you to close your eyes, place your hands in prayer position in front of your heart, and go within. I will let you know when the attunement process is finished and you may open your eyes".

• You may wish to invite Reiki Masters, past, present and future, angels, spirits and Guides to assist in this attunement process, for the highest good of all those participating in this attunement.

STAGE ONE ~ From the Back ~ All Levels

There are two halves to the ceremony, one part done behind the recipient, the other part done in front.

• Walk around the recipients one full circle anti-clockwise, and then behind the row again, standing behind the first recipient.

• Connect with the earth. Hold both hands up silently and again invite Reiki Masters, past, present and future, angels, guides and anyone else appropriate, to be with us to help and support us in this attunement to Reiki.

• You may or may not wish to perform a manoeuvre that cranks the energy up quickly. This is the "Hui Yin manoeuvre". This is done by pressing the tongue on the upper palate of the mouth, while contracting the pelvic floor muscles. This is not a traditional Usui Reiki technique, but is said to increase the power of the attunement.

• Open the Crown Chakra, by visualising and using hand movements as if opening like a book.

• Draw in the breath and hold the tongue on the back of the palate behind the front teeth (optional).

Page 31: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 31

• Hold the non-dominant hand, palm up, next to the recipient's head. This is called the “antenna method”. (The non-dominant hand generally receives energy while the dominant hand generally gives energy.) You may wish to place the dominant hand over the Crown and wait till you feel the energy flow.

• With the dominant hand, draw the Dai Ko Myo over the Crown of the recipient's head.

• Tap on the student's shoulder so that they bring their hands up over their head. If they do not do this, reach over the student's shoulders and take hold of the student's hands between your own and blow the symbol into the crown. Hold your hands around theirs till you feel the energy connection.

• Draw then gently blow the Master Symbol into the Crown Chakra, then guide the energy down through the crown and the spinal column. You are to draw with the palm of the hand, not any other part, and remember to silently say the mantra 3 times with each symbol.

This next section is different for Levels One, Two and Reiki Master.

For First Degree Reiki Attunements

There are four separate attunements for the first degree. Think in terms of setting up the flow for the energy to come into the crown chakra and out the minor chakras in the palms of your hands.

1. Level 1 Reiki ~ First Attunement

• After drawing the Dai Ko Myo and blowing into the crown…

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei, and guide down through to the base of the spine.

2&3. Level 1 Reiki ~ Second and Third Attunements

• After drawing the Dai Ko Myo and blowing into the crown…

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei and the Sei Hei Ki, and guide down the spinal column, one at a time.

4. Level 1 Reiki ~ Forth Attunement

• After drawing the Dai Ko Myo and blowing into the crown…

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki and Hon Sha Zei Sho, and guide down the spinal column, one at a time.

When done with the back portion, place the recipient's hands back over their shoulder to the front. Walk around to the front again with hands held at shoulder height palms facing forward.

STAGE TWO ~ From the Front ~ Level 1 Reiki

• At the front take the recipients hands between your own for a moment. This is why the recipient's hands are to be held in prayer position, for the convenience of holding both together.

• Bring hands in circle (over & up) to your heart level. Hold hands with less dominant hand. Draw the all 4 symbols over the hands (start with Dai Ko Myo, then Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki and Hon Sha Zei Sho Nen) directed towards the heart chakra. Drawing each symbol once, and as you draw silently chanting the name of the symbol three times with each symbol drawn throughout the attunement. Seal energy into fingertips.

• Visualise the master symbol in violet and lightly blow, from the base chakra to the crown chakra.

• Lift hands to throat level. Draw the all of the 4 symbols over the hands directed towards the throat chakra. Seal energy into fingertips.

• Visualise the master symbol in violet and lightly blow, from the base chakra to the crown chakra.

Page 32: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 32

• Bring hands forward and gently open palms like a book.

• Take one hand with less dominant hand, then use dominant hand to draw Cho Ku Rei over palm. Slap into palm three times with yours to anchor the symbol. Repeat with other hand.

• Place their hands in prayer position again at chest height, then raise to level of the forehead (3rd Eye). Draw Dai-Ko Myo & seal into finger tips. Blow through the chakras once more.

• Give back their hands, returning them to the heart centre, visualising that you've given them back to themselves.

• Step back and bow, honouring them for who they are.

After this stage is done, move to the back to close the aura, as described in STAGE THREE.

For Second Degree Reiki Attunements

There are two attunements for the second degree.

Repeat STAGE ONE as above, then From the Back Continue…

1&2. Level 2 Reiki ~ First and Second Attunements

STAGE TWO ~ From the Front ~ Level 2 Reiki

• After drawing the Dai Ko Myo and blowing into the crown…

• Draw Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki and Hon Sha Zei Sho Nen, and guide down the spinal column one at a time, as described for Level 1.

• Move to the front drawing symbols over heart and throat as in Level 1.

• When drawing symbols over the palms, draw Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki and Hon Sha Zei Sho Nen over the palms, and slap to anchor. You may anchor either separately, or draw all three symbols the slap them in to the palms together.

After this stage is done, move to the back to close the aura, as described in STAGE THREE.

For The Third Degree (Master) Attunement

I have seen two main ways to do the Reiki Master Attunement. Either with one or two attunements. If doing two attunements, the first is done to re-affirm Levels 1 and 2. You may either do them together as one long attunement, or separately.

A meditation is done to facilitate the connection between the Master, the Initiate, the Energy and the Guides, in preparation for the Attunement. When the Master intuits that the connection has been made the attunement begins.

1. Reiki Master ~ FIRST ATTUNEMENT (Optional)

• Repeat the final of the First Degree Attunements placing only the Cho Ku Rei into the palms. Then repeat the Second Degree Attunement placing all 3 symbols into the palms.

2. Reiki Master ~ FINAL ATTUNEMENT

• Repeat the Second Degree Attunement, but this time after drawing the other 3 symbols and slapping into the palm, also draw the Dai Ko Myo into the initiate's hands, and clap with yours.

Page 33: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 33

• When the breath is blown out from the front, blow 1/3 from the Root Chakra to the Heart Chakra, 1/3 from the Heart to the Throat Chakra, then 1/3 from the Throat to the Third Eye Chakra.

The Reiki Attunement Completion for All Levels - STAGE THREE

From the Back

• Walk around to the back again in an anti-clockwise direction

• Place your hands on or over the student's head. Use a positive affirmation and repeat it to yourself three times. Intend it to be accepted by the student. Some examples are: "You are perfectly attuned", "You are a True Reiki Healer", or "You are filled with Divine Love and Wisdom", or any other affirmation that is significant to you or the student.

• Open your hands and look down through the Crown Chakra, visualising through to the root chakra. Intend that the great shining light of the Reiki Source fill the heart and all the chakras.

• Draw the power symbol in the aura over the crown and visualise sealing the aura, making sure to leave the crown chakra open. Say to yourself, "I seal this Attunement with Divine Love and Wisdom". Intend that the Process is sealed and complete and the student is now forever connected directly to the Reiki Source. You may place your hands on the student's shoulders briefly if you wish, while contemplating the completion of the attunement.

From the Front

• Once all the recipients have been attuned make another circle around them, ending up in front again.

• Hold your palms toward them. Visualise a glowing mist surrounding you both. Breath in and be filled with this white light mist of Reiki. Blow the mist at the student allowing the final energy of the attunement to bless the student.

• Bow & pay homage. For Master’s Attunement ONLY say: “I honour you, and the creator within you."

• Still holding hands at shoulder height palms forward ask them to come back to this present time and place, finishing their experience. Tell them that you have now completed the 1st (2nd, 3rd, etc.) attunement for Level 1 (2 or 3) Reiki, and that they may now open their eyes whenever they are ready. Keep talking to them, softly, until all have opened their eyes and come back to the awareness of the room.

The Reiki attunement is a quite powerful experience. As the Reiki Master is talking to the recipients, she/he will softly lower their hands. This involves a kind of telepathic connection between the master and the recipients, which requests the recipient's energy field to return to the confines of the recipient's body, if you have not used the Raku at the end of each individual attunement.

• Once everybody is back to full waking consciousness, it is nice to chat about the experience they had. Perhaps some received messages, saw visions, uncovered and healed trauma, or simply had a feeling of peace, contentment and joy. Some may be very emotional. Perhaps they felt nothing at all. Whatever their experience it was perfect for them, and there is no wrong or right about their experiences. Their experiences simply are what they are.

• Offer water or food to help ground them. You may get them to place their hands on one another's shoulders to channel Reiki energy, or even do a Reiki Treatment.

Passing Reiki Attunements by Direct Intention The method of attunement featured here is the direct transmission or crown to crown attunement. This is probably the simplest of all attunement methods. It is one that I

Page 34: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 34

occasionally use in conjunction with the traditional attunement. I offer it as an additional process you might like to experiment with.

Direct intention is used for attunement in many different energy and healing systems, and is perhaps more like Mikao Usui's realisation of Reiki through spirit than like the ritual attunements most often used for Reiki in the West.

The simplest form of the direct attunement is to activate all Reiki functions, set your intention to attune the person or persons to a specific level of Reiki and allow the attunement to run to completion just as you might do a remote healing session.

There are a great many ways to set your intention. The Reiki Teacher and the student will usually sit in chairs facing each other or as part of a circle, or the student may lie down on a massage table or another comfortable location. People could even get up and move around during the attunement or even leave the area and still receive the full attunement. It is, however, preferable to receive the attunement while in a quiet, meditative, receptive state. Most people sit comfortably with their eyes closed and their hands (often palm upwards) on their laps or held in a praying hands position at the heart or throat.

The teacher may specify the Reiki level to be attuned or for example simply ask that the student receive those energies that are in their highest good and in accord with their Soul Purpose. The Teacher will activate the energies by intention and then activate the Attunement by intention. The energies will flow into the teacher's and the student's crown chakras and 'Run' until it is finished clearing blocks, opening channels and connecting the energies, permanently enabling the student to use Reiki. You might set the intention that they be able to use Reiki with or without using the Mantras and symbols traditionally used in Reiki. This offers the ability to use Reiki to people who are unable to activate Reiki with the traditional methods. Another advantage when you intend to give the ability to activate the energies automatically, with or without symbols if appropriate, is that Reiki can be channelled more quickly when speed is of importance.

The Energies are the same; just the activation method is different. But you can set the intention as you want; respecting the student's right to receive only what serves their highest good of course. These attunements are directed by Spirit, the teacher just opens the channel and grounds the energies.

The Direct or crown to crown attunement pretty much runs itself once activated and the procedure can be as simple as activating all Reiki functions and stating or mentally intending to attune a specific individual to a specific level of Reiki and allowing the attunement to run to completion. For example “Reiki for attunement, attune (name) to Reiki Level One “could be the mental intention. However you may prefer to use a more detailed intention and process. Once you activate the energy and the attunement by intention, either with or without consciously using the symbols, the energies will flow into your crown chakra and flow throughout your body. It will also flow or cross to the student's Aura, where it will run until it is finished clearing blocks, opening channels and connecting the energies, permanently enabling the student to use Reiki themselves.

Always intend that the attunement be in accord with the soul purpose and highest good of the recipient. You may wish to mentally voice specific intentions during the attunement. To do this mentally intend that the initiate's crown, brow, heart, hands, eyes, throat, feet, voice aura structures, meridians, chakras, and all other possible appropriate channels be connected with the ability to use and share Reiki. You may intend that the Soulstar and Earthstar chakra consciously become active, that any blocks and impediments be removed, the chakras be cleared, aligned, harmonised, locked into the central channel and mended, that they be are able receive spiritual guidance, energies and healing for themselves and others.

For the second degree intend that they be able to use the second degree functions with and without symbols.

Page 35: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 35

For the Master attunement you should intend that the recipient be able to attune and pass on the ability to practice Reiki to others for all levels.

You may move well beyond verbalisation and perceive the attunement process and intentions as pulsating vibrations and/or colour and sound. Sometimes specific images and information or direction is conveyed as the attunement continues usually most people can feel stages and changes in the attunement as it runs. Not everyone does feel energy or have visual effects of course.

An attunement typically runs around 10 to 15 minutes though where time allows they may take an hour or more the longer attunements seem to include much more healing work and clearing on the recipient in addition to the Attunement.

When the attunement is complete it will taper to a stop. The attunement is concluded with the intention of energetic separation of the connection between the sender and receiver. Intend thanks and appreciation of all participants and a return to mundane grounded awareness and a mental ending of the attunement.

Say something like “This Attunement is complete ". Many Reiki Masters Wash their hands and have the student wash their hands after the attunement to sever any remaining aura connection. Usually this separation occurs naturally as the attunement ends with or without direct intention or action. It is also helpful to touch another human or an animal and use the energy right away.

Distant or Remote Attunement

Just as you can do Reiki treatments for people anywhere in the world, it is possible for an Attunement to be done over great distances.

Remote attunement does enable recipients to channel Reiki but will not substitute for classes, hands on experience and training taken in person. Reiki is simple but not so simple that one need not apply themself to learning the system.

Many people, who are dedicated, motivated, self-starters, have become competent Reiki practitioners after remote attunement. People who have family wellness emergencies might benefit from a remote attunement to give more confidence to their efforts at hands-on and spiritual healing with only minimal training. But in the long term and to really be a Reiki practitioner most people do much better with a class taken in person. Participating in Reiki circles, shares and discussions is one way to round out your Reiki experience.

Developing the light touch and knowing how to be sure that you are using Reiki and not your own energy is easier to learn in person for most people. There are opportunities in many cities for practitioners to meet and treat each other and practice. Chizen School of Reiki also hold ‘Reiki Shares”. There are also many e-mail discussion lists dedicated to Reiki and Reiki training.

Reiki Masters have a responsibility to ensure as much as possible that their students really do have an understanding of the basic skills and ethics of healing practice.

Remote attunement can be valuable in emergency situations such as when someone in a remote area has a specific urgent need to be able to use Reiki.

There are other energy work systems that I feel are more suited to remote attunement, because they do not involve specific hand positions or symbols. They are more concerned with self-healing and spiritual evolution and so do not require as much information about ethics and practice giving treatments as Reiki should.

Page 36: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 36

Most Reiki Masters combine the remote healing technique of using a proxy and give the attunement in person to the proxy while intending that it go to the recipient. You may also use the Direct Intention method as discussed above.

Remote Attunement and Direct Transmission both in person and at distance is an ancient and respected way of transmitting elements of spiritual awakening, wisdom, information or spiritual abilities between teachers and to others.

This is well known in some Buddhist paths. There are references and description of the transmission or initiation of an opening of the inner eyes to a follower, in a letter from Nicheren who was a Tien Tai priest before founding his own sect from around 1156 –1160. I am sure there are older records of this, because he was not writing about a new practice.

However it was probably never as broadly used as has been recently true with Reiki. Most of the records refer to transmissions / initiations / attunements / openings, either to devoted followers at great distance or to transfer the mantle of leadership.

The transmission is not the system and was never meant to be a substitute for personal contact with a teacher and a community of experience. Whether you are attuned by remote attunement or in a class setting, you are responsible for your own practice, study and personal development as a Reiki Practitioner or Master.

I certainly would hope that no one practices remote attunement or remote healing exclusively. If they do it should probably not be called traditional Reiki.

The direct contact and communication between practitioners and teachers, friends and clients is invaluable in maintaining the undiluted clarity of a teaching even while allowing for evolution and growth.

There are some circumstances where remote attunement provides a life saving tool for healing and happiness, particularly for self and family. Remote transmission of Reiki attunement may be used as a prelude to direct training and attunement.

Throughout time, most healing energies have probably been acquired directly from spiritual source usually after long effort in seeking spiritual development and the ability and skill has been gained through trial and error. These days we have tremendous good fortune to be able to learn Reiki and other energy healing practices in a swift simple way rather than dedicating lifetimes for each small step of progress.

It is presumed that anyone who sought attunement would also seek training and persevere with a seeking mind and heart, to develop this precious gift of Reiki. However that has not always proven to be true .I do not do remote Reiki attunement, as a rule because without personal contact I cannot ensure that the individual will pursue the challenge of learning the system and practicing to competence.

I cannot of course guarantee that in person either but I can ensure that at the very least students have some practice and have heard of the ethics and other important elements of practice.

If you do send a remote attunement you may either do a direct transmission or use a proxy. The student may lie down or sit in a comfortable position. They can get up and move around during the attunement or even leave the area and still receive the full attunement. Most people do prefer to be in a quiet meditative receptive state for the attunements and often sit with closed eyes, with hands palm upwards on their laps /knees or held in a praying hands position.

For an absentee attunement the time is agreed upon in advance, if possible the student will try to be in a receptive and accepting or eager to receive mental state, although it is not absolutely necessary that the student be paying attention or even be awake to get the attunement.

Getting the Attunement absentee does require that the recipient commit enough study time to learn and master the techniques on his or her own. Reiki is an intuitive practice but studying the material thoroughly gives intuition a place to start from.

Page 37: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 37

The most common challenge of remote Attunement is helping the recipient learn to turn on and know that they are channelling the Reiki. Some people are expecting rather more dramatic effects than do occur and may have difficulty sensing the subtle energy when they do activate it.

Semi-Traditional Attunement (Diane Stein style) There are many variations of the attunement procedure and Reiki Masters often add personal touches to the process. This version is very much like the one in Diane Stein's Book Essential Reiki.

You will stand for the attunement the students will sit with hands held together in a praying hands position (fingers straight not folded) at chest height.

During most of the attunement many Reiki Masters hold their breath with their tongue held at the roof of their mouth just behind the teeth and may clench their perineal muscles during the process.

Many Reiki Masters do some kind of clearing or opening procedure before beginning the attunement this might be as simple as having everyone wash their hands first, to a full ceremony. This is up to the Reiki Master.

Step behind the chair where the student is seated and open the student’s crown with either a visualisation or a ‘two-handed book-opening’ gesture.

Trace the Dai Ko Myo Symbol over the crown mentally repeat the mantra as you draw the symbol. Reach over the student's shoulders and take hold of the student's hands between your own and blow the symbol into the crown. Take a deep breath and hold it. Then trace the other symbols over the crown and again take the students hands and blow into the crown take another deep breath and hold it.

Now come to the front and open the student’s hands like a book. Trace the Power symbol over both palms and tap the hands three times you may draw all the symbols at once and tap them in or do each one separately. You may also draw the symbols on the fingers and for the third degree over the third eye at the brow. Then take the student's hand in one of your and hold it to the side while you blow from root to heart. Take a deep breath and hold it. Go to the back and close the aura being careful not to close the crown. Some Reiki Masters also open and close the attunement with the Raku. Some Masters do four attunements for level one, two for level two, and one for level three. Some do one Attunement for each level, and a few do all of the levels in one attunement.

Additional Attunement Ideas • Here are some notes about attunements in no particular order. These are practices that you

can do during attunements that you may be led to do, or issues regarding the process.

• All attunements are unique. They are individual. Sometimes you will have feelings to do something or another that might not be in the "script". Trust the Reiki and do them.

• You can attune all 7 chakras including the feet when doing attunements, not just the top four and the hands. The effect can be a bit much for people so use your judgment.

• You can place the symbols/energy directly in to the persons aura / etheric field as well as placing them in the chakras. Visualise the symbols in the energy field and bring the Reiki energy in the field.

• If you feel blockages or the hands not heating up, place the person's finger tips against your palm and send the energy up to the heart, or blow up from palm to heart to open the channel.

• Use the Raku after attunements to "disconnect" from the other person, or make sure to "mentally" disconnect from the other person by intent.

Page 38: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 38

• Remember that Intent is the key for a "perfect attunement". You are just a channel; the source does the attunements, so you cannot mess up! Forgetting a step or action is not going to matter. The Reiki source will make sure that it is right and trust that it will.

• When you finish giving an attunement, you will feel exhilarated. You should not feel drained. Make sure you separate yourself from all expectations. Do the attunement with the intent that the person be perfectly attuned to Reiki. Let the Reiki do the work. Do not strain, or try to put your own energy into the process. Do not use your energy; let the Reiki do the work.

• Do not take on too much with attunements. Although you may feel exhilarated at the time, you may find that you are a little flat afterwards if you over do it.

• The easiest way to perform the attunement is for the student to sit on a chair with their feet on the floor. Have the students hold their hands with palms together at chest height (namaste or gassho position), and tell and show them where you will touch and what you will do with their hands.

• You can attune the chakras in the feet. Bend or kneel and draw the symbols on both the feet at the same time. This can help ground the person.

• You can do the Attunements without symbols. Only attempt this if you have sufficient experience with the energy and with doing attunements. The empowerment that Usui used was called Reiju and was a symbol-less attunement. The level one attunement of the Alliance is done without symbols.

The 21 Day Cleansing Cycle Many Reiki students come to class very concerned about the possibility of severe detoxification after the attunement because they have heard about a 21 day cleansing cycle. I have heard that this cycle was not specifically mentioned by Usui Sensei, but is found in some Western metaphysical systems. I usually do mention this to the student.

It is more accurate to say that when you are attuned your personal healing begins immediately. This sometimes shows up as symptoms of physical or emotional release such as an excess of Gas, diarrhoea or moodiness. This has been called detoxification. Most people do not have noticeable effects of this kind. Some people report a lot of emotional processing for up to 3 weeks or 21 days after an attunement. Some people report having unusually vivid dreams just after the attunement.

Anyone getting Reiki treatments and or attunements is encouraged to drink lots of water. This often reduces or eliminates any so-called detoxification symptoms. Everyone should be reminded that in some cases the release of toxins or energetic or physical realignments may cause them to feel worse for a small time before they feel better.

Some people may feel somewhat uncomfortable when chronic physical, emotional or mental conditions are alleviated because they are unaccustomed to feeling well.

Anyone who has a detoxification reaction is encouraged to self-treat with Reiki often and to contact their Reiki teacher for help. Any severe or continuing unusual discomfort should be referred to an appropriate medical professional because it may not have any relationship to the attunement at all.

Sometimes normal reactions to events that occur and emotions that surface during the period just after attunement are attributed to detoxification when they might really be simply a freer expression and awareness of feelings that can be an effect of attunement.

Cleansing cycles or a period of change or detoxification and integration of the energies or transformations is not exclusive to Reiki but may occur during any major shift of life or spiritual practices. Or even as part of the normal reaction to events in your daily life, such as adjusting to a new job. Many different spiritual traditions as well as some psychologists teach that it usually takes about 2 weeks to 30 days to make any real lasting change in behaviour. Many

Page 39: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 39

attunements from other systems also mention a similar cycle of days while the energy or transformation integrates completely.

Some teach that The first seven days is focused on personal issues and physical and emotional development. The second week focuses more on relationships and community issues and mental integration. The last week is focused on divine or spiritual transformation and adjustment. This is a period of 3 days per chakra, as they are cleared.

The cycle affects the body. When the session or attunement ends this cycle begins. Some of the changes and insights learned along the way may take longer to fully manifest, or integrate but the first 21 days is considered a very important part in this process by many.

Symptoms attributed to detoxification can include excess gas, colds and emotional mood swings however normally these are rare and not severe when they do occur.

The following chart is one version from a very old metaphysical book. I actually think that the concept of the twenty-one day period may come from non-Japanese sources. Perhaps we could simply say that obstacles and karma may come up when you make positive changes.

The 21 Day Cleansing, Detoxification or Transformation Chart 1. Also days 8 & 15. Root Chakra- Support & Physical Body. Primal Power.

2. Also days 9&16. Sacral Chakra- Sex, Creativity, Intimacy, Ego.

3. Also days 10 & 17. Solar Plexus Chakra Emotions (gut feelings). Feelings for other people. Gland- pancreas.

4. Also days 11& 18 Heart & Thymus Chakra self. Love in general. Compassion, Communication. Gland- thymus.

5. Also days 12 & 19. Throat Chakra Expression, Responsibility. Gland- thyroid.

6. Also days 13 & 20. Brow, Third Eye Chakra- Ideas, vision, the mind. Purpose. Gland- pituitary.

7. Also days 14& 21. Crown Chakra Colour Integration, Higher Mind Direction. Gland- Pineal.

Each week has a full cycle through the chakras one day focusing on each.

Though the work is not limited to only one chakra a day the primary focus will be on one. Reiki will bring up and help to clear issues that prevent wellness or standing in the way of the person's spiritual and personal evolution. This cycle can happen whether you are receiving or giving a Reiki treatment or healing. In fact, it happens every time you make a change of any kind. The only difference is the focus. Students are asked to inform the Reiki Master if they do have severe or unusual reactions after the attunement.

The Reiki teacher may recommend that students do a self-treatment for 21 days, or even come in for several days of individual treatment in cases of severe detoxification. The teacher should suggest that a doctor be consulted if there are physical symptoms. Not every physical or emotional event that follows attunement will be detoxification.

The Exchange Issue Anyone who becomes involved in Reiki sooner or later encounters a major issue and Cultural /Ethical conflict. In the Reiki World there is a clash between two views of thought.

1. That a true "Healer" would never charge or expect compensation for the work, and

2. A philosophy stated to be a teaching of Dr Usui, that one must give some exchange to receive full benefit and must balance any exchange of energy, and that free treatment creates an unacceptable spiritual debt for the healee.

Page 40: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 40

The attitude that people only value what they pay for verses the attitude that spiritual energies are a gift from God and must be free. These are only a few of the components in this issue.

The beggar story (that Usui Sensei healed in a slum for many years until discovering that many beggars preferred to remain beggars) that is often told to illustrate a supposed requirement, was probably meant to illustrate that not everyone wants to be healed. You cannot define what constitutes healing to another and you cannot force healing. (This same story is taught in some Buddhist sects with different people and to illustrate other points as well, and is in my opinion, a traditional teaching Parable that has been adapted).

It is common for people to devalue themselves to the point where they will not pay for something that could help their own well being.

It is also common for new Reiki practitioners to devalue themselves, even when they may be wishing to use their Reiki as a part of a new career path. I do suggest that we all strive to put aside our preconceptions on this issue and be truly fair to all. Remember, they are not paying for the energy, but for the time, effort, training and cost to you, to learn and give Reiki. This manual in itself took months of preparation and work. One must be fair to oneself also.

It is important that no one feel abused or used but also not to castigate someone as being greedy if they want a fair payment for the time, energy and work they do, even if you wish that the service were free. I am amazed that so many people feel that their own health, happiness and spiritual evolution is not worth even a modest cost for a class or treatment. Part of the exchange issue for students, teachers and practitioners is how much we love and respect ourselves.

Any exchange should be fair, equitable and acceptable to all parties involved. It often does seem that people use and appreciate Reiki more if they have made some kind of contribution of their energy and resources, and have helped to cover the cost to the practitioner of providing the time, venue, training, materials and personal effort for the class or treatment. Many Reiki Masters who began by offering free attunement find that they cannot continue to do so because the actual cost to them of manuals, other materials, childcare and so on, is too great a burden on them and their families. Oddly it is also true that some of the very people who are most insistent that the attunements should be free also feel that "you get what you pay for ". Perhaps people underestimate the value Reiki will have in their lives.

The tradition of exchange is a valid one. We all return to the Universe what we receive and receive what we send out. Exchange can be any use of the energies received for the universal good. I do accept the concept of exchange for value and I do believe in balance. Exchange is indeed the Universal Law but to me exchange and Karma may not be simple one-to-one events that occur in linear reality, but are Universal in scope. Remember that an exchange may be as simple as someone offering to mow your lawns, or do some service for you. It is also up to you if you may wish to sponsor someone who you feel really needs to be able to do Reiki to help others, but may not be able to afford the fee, or to reduce your fee as you see fit. One must use ones own intuition and understanding regarding this.

Our Philosophy • Honesty and clarity in one’s thinking.

• The willingness to recognise prejudices in oneself, and to replace it with truth and love.

• Compassion for those who have decided not to do this.

• Speaking the truth without judgment or blame.

• Respect for the right of others to form their own values and beliefs.

• Placing greater value on learning from experience and inner guidance than on the teachings of an authority.

Page 41: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 41

• Basing the value of a theory or technique on the verifiable results it helps one achieve.

• Being open to results rather than attached to them.

• Taking personal responsibility for one’s situation in life.

• Assuming that one has the resources or the ability to develop them, in order to solve any problem encountered.

• Using negative and positive experiences to heal and grow.

• Trusting completely in the Higher Power regardless of the name one chooses to call it.

• The complete expression of Love as the highest goal.

• To openly acknowledge the value provided by all Reiki practitioners and teachers regardless of their lineage or affiliation.

• To promote friendly cooperation between all Reiki practitioners and teachers toward the goal of healing themselves and planet earth, through the use of Reiki.

• To establish and maintain standards for teaching Reiki.

• To encourage students to become successful Reiki teachers if they are guided to do so.

Reiki Ethics for Professional Practice Naturally at the Master level Ethics are very important. The Teaching Master is not a Guru or holy person and should not expect devotion from students as such. Costs and training should be provided in a complete and equitable way and promised training should be given equally, without bias or favouritism.

• The Reiki Master should behave in a moral and ethical way toward all students. The Ethical standards discussed at earlier Reiki levels still apply. The information and confidences of your clients and students is confidential and not to be divulged to others. Work to fully express the Usui Ideals.

• Respect and value all Reiki practitioners and masters regardless of lineage or Organisational affiliation. Refrain from making negative statements about other Reiki practitioners or masters.

• Actively work to create harmony and friendly cooperation between all Reiki practitioners and masters regardless of lineage or organisational affiliation.

• Encourage all students to use their own inner guidance in deciding who to receive Reiki treatments from or who to study Reiki with including the possibility of studying with more than one teacher.

• Always work to empower your clients and students to heal themselves and to encourage and assist them in their personal growth, as well as in the development of their Reiki practice.

• Always treat your students and clients with the greatest respect. Never engage in any illegal or immoral activity with your clients or students.

• Abstain from the use of drugs or alcohol during all professional activities.

• Practice Truth in Advertising. Be willing to openly discuss the subjects covered in your Reiki classes, the fee that is charged, and the amount of time spent in class with any prospective students.

• Be actively working on your own healing so as to embody and fully express the essence of Reiki in everything you do.

• Educate the client regarding the value of Reiki and explain that it does not guarantee a cure, and is not a substitute for medical or psychological treatment.

Page 42: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 42

• Acknowledge that Reiki works in conjunction with other forms of medical or psychological care. If a client has a medical or psychological condition, suggest, in addition to giving them Reiki treatments, they see a health care practitioner if they are not already seeing one.

• Never diagnose medical or psychological conditions or prescribe medications. Never suggest that a client change or end dosages of substances prescribed by other licensed health care providers or suggest the client change prescribed treatment or interfere with the treatment of a licensed health care provider.

The following suggestion is from one of the more Traditional Usui Reiki Organisations possibly Reiki Alliance. Please use them as a guideline only.

Professional Conduct:

Reiki practitioners conduct themselves in a professional and ethical manner, perform only those services for which they are qualified, and represent their education, certification, professional affiliations and other qualifications honestly. They do not in any way profess to practice medicine or psychotherapy, unless licensed by their province or country to do so.

Health History and Referrals:

Reiki practitioners should keep accurate client records, including profiles of the body, mind and health history. They discuss any problem areas and refer clients to appropriate medical or psychological professionals when indicated. (Not all practitioners do keep detailed health type records those who follow a clinical practice model do, others who practice in a less formal way may not keep detailed records or any records at all).

Professional Appearance:

Reiki practitioners pay close attention to cleanliness and professional appearance of self and clothing, of linen and equipment, and of the office environment in general. They endeavour to provide a relaxing atmosphere, giving attention to reasonable scheduling and clarity about fees.

Communication and Confidentiality:

Reiki practitioners maintain clear and honest communications with their clients, and keep all client information, whether medical or personal, strictly confidential. They clearly disclose techniques used, appropriately identifying each in the scope of their professional practice.

Intention and Trust:

Reiki practitioners are encouraged to clarify their intention to facilitate therapeutic change of a holistic nature, and to develop the ability to focus mindfully on the Body /Mind / Self. To establish and maintain trust in the client relationship, they are encouraged to ask caring questions about the client's well being, and to establish clear boundaries and an atmosphere of safety.

Respect of Clients:

Reiki practitioners respect the client's physical/emotional state, and do not abuse clients through actions, words or silence, nor take advantage of the therapeutic relationship. They in no way participate in sexual activity with a client. They consider the client's comfort zone for touch and for degree of pressure, and honour the client's requests as much as possible within personal, professional and ethical limits. They acknowledge the inherent worth and individuality of each person and therefore do not unjustly discriminate against clients or colleagues.

Professional Integrity:

Reiki practitioners present Reiki in a professional and compassionate manner, representing themselves and their practice accurately and ethically. They conduct their business honestly, and do not give fraudulent information, nor misrepresent themselves to students or clients, nor act in a manner derogatory to the nature and positive intention of Reiki.

Page 43: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 43

Awareness:

Reiki practitioners refrain from abuse of alcohol and drugs. These substances should not be used at all during professional activities.

Professional Excellence:

Reiki practitioners strive for professional excellence through regular assessment of personal and professional strengths and weaknesses, and by continued education and training.

Equality:

All Reiki practitioners of the same level should be treated as equals without regard to their initiating Master or their belief system. All Reiki Teacher/Masters should be treated as equals without regard to their initiating Master or their membership (or lack of membership) of any body or association.

Student Rights:

Reiki Teachers respect each student's right to choose their own healing path and their initiating Master.

Teacher’s Responsibilities:

All Reiki Teachers should present only the information handed down from Mikao Usui through the Japanese lineage, as Usui Reiki. Any use of other material should be clearly introduced as such.

Teaching Reiki There are probably as many ways to teach Reiki as there are teachers.

You may not teach exactly as you are taught but you will have a responsibility to make sure that the basic material is covered and that traditional and contemporary Reiki, and additions from outside traditional Reiki, are clearly identified. Most new Reiki Masters first teach using the manuals they received during their training, or Reiki Manuals that are in publication. Then later they may write their own. How you structure your class will vary according to your own style and that of the students who come to you. The structure you use should be one that is appropriate and comfortable for you and your students.

Many people are somewhat insecure of even fearful that there may be some conflict with their own religious faith so it is wise to keep any religious element to the absolute minimum unless you are quite certain that your students are kindred spirits.

The degree of ritual and ceremony accompanying Reiki attunement varies from almost none, to a major formality. This is all right, if it feels right to you and your students. This manual has several different versions of attunements that you can choose from or adapt. Whatever ritual or ceremonial form you use to conduct the attunement it will work provided your intention is set and the recipients accept the attunement.

Well before the day of the class you will want to have planned an outline of the class, and taken care of the details of manuals, teaching materials, time, location and cost.

Decide what attunement form to use well ahead of the class day. If you will be paying for a location for your class it is wise to have collected an advance deposit from your students. This is so that if they do not attend the class or cancel at the last moment you will be able to cover at least some of the costs you have incurred.

The Class Location and Preparation

If you are teaching at a location other than your own home, store or office try to visit first and make sure the location is suitable. Is it quiet enough for teaching? Is there a kitchen or are

Page 44: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 44

restaurants nearby? Will students need to bring their own lunch or snacks? Are chairs provided? Is there a table for students to use when writing symbols? Can you bring a hot water kettle or coffee maker, or is one provided. Does the facility allow eating on the premises?

Make sure that rest rooms are available and that they are working and clean, See if there is privacy for your students during the class. Some places such as Condominium or Senior Recreation Centres may expect you to allow their members to wander through at will if they allow you to use their facilities.

Have your chosen music ready if you plan to use it, and make sure the equipment works. Will you be allowed to light candles or burn incense? Some facilities have fire regulations that prohibit all flame. Some teachers ceremonially burn the paper on which the symbols are practiced; if you intend to do this you would need a safe container and location for this.

If you serve tea or snacks or if people bring lunch you will want to have cups, plates, napkins, spoons sugar and a garbage bag for debris. In many locations it is common to have bottled water on hand. Make sure the rest room is clean and available. If the class is at your home it is also wise to make sure that all rooms are clean as some people may need to change clothes or lie down, etc.

Have selected or written material you will be using ready with handouts and teaching materials. Make sure you have enough manuals, handouts and certificates (if you give certificates) for your expected students. Have pens and paper for your students and clipboards if there is no table or place for students to take notes or practice writing symbols. Set up a Reiki/massage table if you have one, and there is room to have it out during the class. Have chairs, tissues, cushions a blanket and so forth available. If you do not have a massage table decide where you will demonstrate treatments.

Preparation on Class Day

It is hoped that you will be well rested and prepared on the day of the class.

If the class is not at your home try to arrive early enough to complete your preparations in an unhurried way. Before the students arrive you might want to give yourself a self-treatment. Do your meditation and any personal preparation. You might want to clear the room and you may like to do an invocation, light incense or oil, put on some music, etc. You should do it now rather than after the students arrive if possible.

Your class and your attunement should have a clear beginning, middle and end.

• Teach as you would like to be taught

• Know something about your students

• Use simple words to communicate concepts

• Have breaks scheduled

• Organise the presentation so that it flows in a way that makes sense to you and your students

• Do not try to prove that you are right, let students have their own realisations

• You can hold a class for one person or for a large number of people, however if you have at least two students they can practice together while you teach and observe. Try to avoid too large a group. While doing Reiki and attunements can be exhilarating, a very large a class may be difficult to keep running smoothly .You want to be able to give each student individual attention.

• Relax and enjoy sharing this wonderful gift with your students.

Page 45: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 45

Reiki Class Format Suggestions There are several formats that are used for classes. The teacher must decide how they want to teach and how long will each class be. Very few people have time for a classic apprenticeship of one or more years, as was the case in Japan.

Reiki Level One If there is anyone in class who has never received Reiki, you may wish to give them a sample early on. If you are doing the four-part Reiki one attunement you will want to space the segments throughout the class time. It has been suggested that there be a minimum of 3 hours, and a maximum of 24 hours between attunements. When a student has completed the First Degree attunements, they should ground themself as soon as possible. Perhaps you may wish to allow them to give themselves or each other a treatment to pull through the energy and widen the band. You may also give food, water, etc. as discussed in Level 1.

People who have worked with other energy systems using active chi or polarity sometimes have to be reminded that when you turn Reiki on it flows without the practitioner having to push or "do" something to "make it work". It can take a little while for everyone to get the technique of commanding the Reiki on and allowing it to flow.

Any one may take Reiki Level One

Often with traditional Western Reiki the class is held either over one weekend or Friday evening and the weekend, to allow time to space out the 4 part attunements. Others may choose to teach Reiki One in only one Day. Some people have taught Reiki one over eight weeks, with about 2 hours for each session. With individual students or couples who have read the manual before class, a 4 hour class may even be permissible.

Page 46: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 46

Reiki Level 1 Course Outline

Day 1

• Registration and sign in

• Introductions - Name, work, family, metaphysical background, understanding of Reiki, why you want to learn Reiki, and something you like about yourself.

• What is Reiki, how does it work, the different levels, how attunements work.

• The History of Reiki, Reiki Precepts, The Three Pillars: Gassho, Reiji-ho, Chiryo

• Gassho Meditation technique

• Morning Tea

• Meditation

• 1st Attunement for Reiki Level 1

• Reiki hand positions for treating self and others

• Meditation

• 2nd Attunement for Reiki Level 1

• Lunch

• How to do a treatment on another person

• Practical demonstrations

• Completion of Day 1

• Homework– Do a full treatment on yourself—read through manuals

Day 2

• Basic Anatomy. Metaphysical Causation

• Meditation

• 3rd Attunement for Reiki Level 1

• Morning Tea and discussion

• Chakras and Auras

• Chakra Balancing practical

• Meditation

• 4th Attunement for Reiki Level

• Lunch

• Practical- Full Body Reiki Treatments

• Presentation of Certificates, photos, etc.

• Completion of Level 1 Reiki Course

• Homework– try to do a self treatment for the next 21 days, and also practice doing Reiki

on others. The more you use your Reiki, the more confident you will become.

Page 47: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 47

Reiki Level Two Reiki Two is often held over a weekend but may also be done in combination with Reiki One. Due to lack of time for most of our students, I now conduct Level 1 and 2 over one weekend.

In Japan a practitioner may have to wait for 10 or 20 years to achieve Level 2, and longer for the Master Training. Thankfully, this is not the way of the West. Often it is recommended that one wait at least 21 days to a month after taking Reiki One, practice self treatment daily if possible, and treat at least 10 other people before taking the Level Two class. Most times this class is taught either in one day or in one weekend but some teachers do take longer.

Reiki 2 Course Outline Day 1

• Registration and Sign-in. Collect name tags and make payment for workshop.

• Brief Discussion and Morning Tea Why are you taking this class? What are your expectations? Do you have any questions about 1st Degree Reiki?

• Introduction to the Level Reiki 2 symbols Given the names and pronunciations of the Reiki symbols Given the meanings (intentions) of each symbol.

• Drawing the Symbols practice

• Meditation

• 1st attunement for Level 2 Reiki

• Lunch

• Demonstration using the Reiki symbols for hands-on treatment

• Practical Treatments using symbols

• Homework Assignment The Reiki symbols are to be memorised by the next class.

• Practice the Gassho meditation.

• Bring a photo of someone you would like to send Reiki to tomorrow. Perhaps you could call them and get their permission the night before if you wish.

Day 2

• Morning Tea

• Draw the symbols and write the names of the symbols for the instructor. Give the meaning (power) of each symbol.

• Practical Scanning & Beaming with and without symbols

• Meditation

• 2nd attunement for Level 2 Reiki

• Teach “Mentals”

• Trade “Mentals”

• Learn the step by step formula of using the symbols to send Reiki long distance. Learn how Reiki can be sent into the past present or the future.

• Lunch

• Practice sending Reiki with a photo and to each other.

• Japanese Reiki Techniques

• Grounding exercises

• Reiki Add-ons –Thoughts, Energy, Feelings, Emotions & Water Molecules

• Developing Your Reiki Practice

• Question/Answer period

• Presentation of Certificates and photographs

Reiki Master and Teacher

Page 48: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 48

The requirement and time devoted to the Reiki Master Training can be extremely varied. While some teach all three levels in one weekend, and this is successful for many, most teachers recommend a wait of from six months to a year after the Reiki Two training.

Some teachers require students to have kept a Reiki Journal and provide documentation of from fifty to 100 treatments for different people before accepting them into a Reiki Master class.

Some teachers have students meet at least once a month for a year and do many supervised treatments. Some teachers require their Master student to provide students for several classes and treatments, which the Master supervises (and gets all the payments for them).

Some teachers require their students to write their own manual before certifying them.

Other Teachers have just done the attunement and taught the empowerment symbol and a way to attune and that is it! This is clearly not adequate though with perseverance one can self-teach and fill in the gaps.

Many teachers do divide the Master Level into two separate sections, doing the attunement and basic teaching in the first part and focusing on teaching Reiki in the second part.

There are all kinds of possibilities for ways to develop your class outlines and materials.

Most good Reiki teachers will be open for students to follow-up should they have any questions, either in person or by phone and e-mail. You may also be given one of the Reiki Master Videos to watch before the course if possible.

Reiki Master Course Outline – 2 Days

These days people seem to have so many commitments with their time and may be unable to commit to a workshop. So if the class is not too large you may like to teach it over 2 days however it may be advisable to give students their manuals a week earlier to allow them time to look through the material.

Day 1

• Registration at 9am sharp.

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• Introduction to Reiki Master Course and discussion of why you are doing Reiki Master training, what you hope to achieve, and how you will put you new knowledge into practice.

• Questions and answers from Reiki 1 and 2 and other experiences.

• Revision of Level 1 & Level 2 symbols and introduction to the Master Symbols and their uses.

• Morning Tea

• Meditation

• 1st attunement for Reiki Master (repeat of Level 1 and Level 2 attunements to ensure your channel is prepared and in harmony with Master attunement energy)

• Lunch Break

• 2nd attunement for Reiki Master

• The Reiki attunement process for all levels.

• Homework. Read over manual and practice doing an attunement for Level 1 and 2.

Day 2

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• Demonstrate and practice doing Reiki Level 1, 2 and Master attunements on each other.

• Morning Tea and discussion

• Seichim Discussion.

• Attunement for Seichim Master (and Seichim Level 1 if not already attuned)

• The Seichim Attunement process and practice

• Lunch Break

Page 49: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 49

• Reiki Treatment Practical using all symbols.

• Reiki and Seichim attunement practice.

• Revision of all material. Questions and answers

• Presentation of Certificates and Photos

• COMPLETION! (We may finish early on this day, depending on time taken to cover the material).

Reiki Master Course Outline – 3 Days

Day 1

• Registration

• Morning Tea and discussion of why you are doing Reiki Master training, what you hope to achieve, and how you will put you new knowledge into practice. Questions and answers from Reiki 1 and 2 and other experiences.

• Introduction to Reiki Master Course

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• Revision of Reiki Level 1 and Level 2 workshop information, precepts and symbols

• Master Symbols and their uses

• 1st Attunement for Reiki Master (repeat of Level 1 and Level 2 attunements to ensure your channel is prepared)

• Lunch Break

• The Reiki Attunement process and practice doing all 4 Reiki Level 1 attunements on each other.

Day 2

• Morning Tea and discussion

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• 2nd Attunement for Reiki Master

• Lunch Break

• Demonstrate and practice doing Reiki Level 2 and Reiki Master’s attunements on each other.

• Reiki treatments on each other

• Closing prayer or meditation

Day 3

• Morning Tea and discussion - The values and spiritual orientation of a true Reiki Master

• Opening meditation or prayer

• Seichim Discussion.

• Attunement for Seichim Master

• Lunch Break

• Seichim Attunement practice

• Direct Intention and Distant Attunement practice

• Non-traditional and advanced Reiki techniques

• Teaching Reiki for all levels. Questions and Answers

• Lunch Break

• Revision of all material. Questions and answers

• Presentation of Certificates and Photos

• COMPLETION! (We may finish early on this day, depending on time taken to cover the material).

Page 50: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 50

Reiki Master Course Outline – 4 Days

Day 1

• Morning Tea and discussion of why you are doing Reiki Master training, what you hope to achieve, and how you will put you new knowledge into practice. Questions and answers from Reiki 1 and 2 and other experiences.

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other • Introduction to Reiki Master Course

• Revision of Reiki Level 1 and History

• Master Symbols and their uses

• Gassho Meditation on the Reiki Symbols

• 1st Attunement for Reiki Master

• Lunch

• The Reiki Attunement process

• Practice Reiki I Attunement - Discuss, demonstrate have students practice • Questions and answers

Day 2

• Morning Tea and discussion

• Revision of Precepts and Reiki Level 2

• Revision and testing of all Reiki Symbols

• Meditation, or prayer to join the group to the Higher Power and each other

• 2nd Attunement for Reiki Master

• Lunch

• Full Reiki Treatment

• Reiki II Attunement - Discuss, demonstrate have students practice

• Closing prayer or meditation

• Given the second Reiki Master Video to watch before

• Day 3

• Questions and answers Day 3

• Morning Tea and discussion - The values and spiritual orientation of a true Reiki Master

• Opening meditation or prayer

• Revision of Symbols

• Reiki III/Master Attunement - Discuss, demonstrate, have students practice

• Attunement for Seichim Master

• The Seichim Attunement process

• Lunch

• Meditation

• Non-traditional and advanced Reiki techniques

• Teaching Reiki for all levels

• Questions and Answers

Day 4

• Morning Tea and discussion

• Meditation

• Direct Intention and Distant Attunement practice

• Seichim Attunement practice

• Lunch

• Revision of all material. Questions and answers

• Presentation of Certificates and Photos

• Completion (We may finish early on this day, depending on time taken to cover the material

There is a lot to cover in a Reiki Master’s Workshop, so if you have a large class it may be necessary to teach the class over 2 weekends. When this is done, the class times change (from 9am to 6pm as for 2 Day Workshops) to 10am to 4pm each day. The shorter days allow everyone to relax and get to know each other better. I rarely do 4-Day Workshops these days as most of my students live busy lives and prefer to do it in one weekend. However, when we do only 2 days, students then have the option to come back and assist or observe a Level 2 and Level 2 Class to learn more from the teacher’s perspective. Here is a suggested format for a 4 Day Workshop.

Page 51: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 51

A Reiki Meditation Meditations are an important part of your Reiki Courses. Please feel free to use these, whenever you wish, and to make your own personal meditations for your classes and treatments if you wish.

Settle in to a place of comfort and relaxation, of warmth and safety. Take slow, deep cleansing breaths. Breathing in from your diaphragm, filling your lungs with fresh, cleansing air.

Breathe in Love and Compassion, Light and Energy, and gently hold your breath. And as you exhale, release all that is not loving, all that is not light.

Allow the Universal Light Energy of Reiki to enter your body, you mind and your soul through the crown chakra at the top of your head. Feel the energy flow throughout your entire body, mind, soul and your spirit. Through the third eye chakra, through the throat chakra. Feel the energy building in your heart as you continue to breathe deeply and slowly. With each breath the warmth and energy spreads throughout your body, opening up your entire being to the healing possibilities of Reiki and Light and Energy and Universal Regard.

Feel all the muscles in your body as they become more and more relaxed. Sending roots from the bottom of your feet deep into the earth, drawing up Ki from the Earth, the sustaining energy of all that it is going up through your body. The energy flows to your solar plexus chakra, the sun chakra, the centre of being from which warmth radiates throughout your body along the meridian systems, down to you belly chakra, survival, release of emotion, well being, security, happiness, contentedness, love, compassion, reconciliation, and forgiveness. All that is love, opening up the root chakra as well. Balance, Grounding, Harmony, Acceptance.

The relaxation spreads up your legs around your knees and thighs, and into your seat, your stomach, your trunk, your back, your shoulders and arms. Imagine a warm, swirling flow of light, liquid love swirling from the top of your head around your forehead, and eyes and nose and cheeks and jaws and neck and shoulders. Flowing down your arms, Feel the chakra point in the centre of your palms, opening, drawing in light and love, and giving light and love in return.

Gently, as you are comfortable, place your hands, palms down on some part of your body, and feel the energy flow in a great circle from sky and universe and earth, through your body like a hollow reed. Back into your body, cycling Universal Love and Light and Energy and Connection, to promote opening, to promote awareness, perception, intuition and healing, balancing your body in harmony with all that is.

Listen to the sound of the music deepening this relaxed state. Be aware of the sound of the wind in the trees and the songs of birds. All that is alive, all that is part of Creation, is in attune and harmony with what you will experience here today.

Open Mind... Open Heart... Open Spirit and Open Soul. Feel the energy circulating around this circle between each of us. We are all interconnected, we are all One.

Imagine the Energy flowing between us all in a violet circle of light.

Imagine the Energy lifting above our heads, joining together in a point of light, leaving the room and floating above this building, rising above this City, sending light and energy to all who are open, to all who are here. Birds songs carrying the message throughout the region, spreading now to above the whole state and above our country, the Southern Hemisphere. Points of radiant energy and light themselves, spreading energy throughout the earth, to the whole of Australia, to England, to America, to Germany, to Sweden, to Africa and to all the countries and places in the world where other healers are connected with us today. The synergy between us all creates an ever-increasing flow of energy to promote healing and well being and light.

Page 52: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 52

Relaxation throughout our bodies, spreading to a cellular level. All the components of our cells and cell nuclei and mitochondria the energy factories of the body, in balance and harmony with the Universe. Sending energy out to balance all that is, to create harmony.

Balance this point between the Universal Light, the Ki or Energy from the Heavens and the Energy that comes from the Earth. Imagine yourself poised at a point of balance between all the sources of Energy we have today available. Grounded, in touch with who we are and what we want and what we will become. Heaven and Earth become one.

We seek the Light and Love and Energy in other people and honour both the light within ourselves and the light in other people. We reach out in love and harmony to all living things. Just for today not to anger, Just for today not to worry, to honour all living things, our elders, and teachers and parents, to have gratitude for all that we have and for all that is to be given to us. Just for today to be honest in our work as we earn our living and how we exchange love and energy with other people.

We are opening ourselves to the flow of Reiki, allowing it to pass through us to promote healing in self and in all others, and to express gratitude and thanks that this is our birth right, that this is part of who we are.

Help us remember that Reiki is what we are, That Reiki is who we are, that Reiki holds us together in positive unconditional regard and love. We are one, we are connected, we are whole, we are in unity.

To all our spiritual guides we ask that they be present with us today. That they be present with us offering their guidance, and love and support. And that we accept the light in one another, in harmony and balance. Throughout this day, keep your hands in contact with your body, with the various chakras and feel the flow of energy. Build the energy in this room and in this community in this world and in this universe.

Focused centred and in balance, opening to the love and flow that is Reiki.

Continue to relax throughout the day and breath deeply in all that is love and all that is light.

Reiki is Love. Reiki is Light, The Universal Life Force that creates and holds all that is together as one.

Reiki is a system of healing, of laying on hands, of promoting energy exchange with respect for free will, with the greatest good for all concerned as its intent.

Today is a time of growth and introspection, of warmth and love, and regard and healing, from the bottom of our feet to the top of our heads, open vessels overflowing with God's love.

Let your spirits fly to those special places in your consciousness. To the mountain tops, allow revelation and introspection to be part of this experience, knowing that the birthing process that takes place today, is only the beginning and will continue onward through all that you do, and breathe and seek and see.

Reiki is love and has brought us here together today.

Now slowly and gently open your eyes, remembering that this state of relaxation will stay with you throughout the day and continue to build as the Energy flows around us.

Come back to this moment, fully relaxed and fully aware, alert and ready to move on into this wonderful day, and into your future....

Another Reiki Meditation Make yourself comfortable. You may choose to sit in a cosy chair, or simply lie down and find a comfortable position on the floor. Make sure that your spine is straight, your feet separated and simply dropping to the sides, your hands out from your body, palms facing upwards, fingers softly curled.

Page 53: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 53

Breath deeply, and as you do, allow the lungs to fill with oxygenated air. Allow your lungs to expand widthways, and the diaphragm to expand down into the abdomen, and as you do, be aware of the rise and fall of the chest, and the rise and fall of the abdomen, with each inhalation and exhalation.

Now visualise a golden ball of energy floating above your head. With every breath you draw this golden energy in though the crown of your head, and allow it to flow down to the tips of your toes. As this energy enters your feet, you are now aware of the muscles slowly relaxing and releasing all tension, allowing your feet to simply fall to the sides and let go.

As you continue to breath, you continue to draw more and more of this ki, chi, prana or Lifeforce energy into your body, allowing it to fill and flow, moving up through your ankles, into your calves, your knees, your thighs and your hips, so that your legs are becoming heavier, and heavier with every breath, more and more relaxed with every exhalation. With every breath you feel energy and relation flow up through your body like a gentle wave, allowing you to relax even more, releasing, letting go, and bringing you to a state of peace and total relaxation.

As this golden energy enters the trunk of your body, you now release the tension from your abdomen, your pelvic floor and your lower back, and you are again aware of the rise and fall of you abdomen, with each inhalation and exhalation, releasing, letting go, relaxing more and more.

As you breath, drawing more and more of this energy into your body, you are now aware that this is healing energy which flows through every muscle, every cell, going to where it is needed. Cleansing, de-toxifying, balancing and healing where ever is needed, mentally, physically, emotionally or spiritually, bringing you back to a natural state of balance, harmony, and a natural state of health.

As you draw more and more of this Lifeforce energy into the trunk of your body, it now flows up through your spine like a warm wave, relaxing your lower back, your upper back, releasing tension from your chest, and you are again aware of the rise and fall of the chest with every breath.

As this relaxation flows into your shoulders you now feel them soften and let go, falling down, melting into the carpet, releasing all tension, all control from this part of your body. As you breathe, you are now aware of this relaxation flowing down your arms, relaxing your biceps, your triceps, your forearms, and now flowing into your hands. As this Lifeforce energy flows through your hands, you are now aware of a warmth or a tingling sensation, as the Lifeforce energy now flows freely from the small chakras in the centre of your hands, out to heal this universe. If you wish, you may now choose to place your hands somewhere on your body, to channel more of this healing energy back to help heal wherever is needed, mentally, physically, emotionally or spiritually.

As you continue to breath, you continue to draw this Ki, Chi, Prana or Lifeforce energy in through the crown of your head, and it continues to fill your body, now flowing up, releasing tension from you neck, as you feel it softly settle even further into the carpet.

This relaxation now flows through your scalp, and now into your forehead, where you are now aware of all tension, all stress, leave your forehead, your eyes, your nose, your cheeks, your lips and your jaw, so that you are now totally relaxed and a t peace.

As you lie here now, this energy continues to fill you, and now overflows through the crown of your head, drifting down to surround your body, forming a soft cocoon, which cradles and protects you.

You feel safe, protected, you feel free and at peace. You feel at one with the Universe. Allow these healing energies to now flow through every muscle, every cell, every fibre, and know that this is your natural state of being; that you can bring yourself to whenever you are tired or felling stressed. All you need to do is breath deeply, relax the muscle of your body, and as the body relaxes, the mind follows.

Page 54: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 54

Spend a few moments now in this natural tranquil relaxed state, and take this time to heal. Allow yourself this time, and know that you deserve love, respect, kindness and happiness in your life. That you are special and unique in every way. That you have been brought to this world because there is something that you and you alone can give to this world.

Choose now to take a little time each day to nurture your inner soul. Look for the positives in yourself and others, and know that what we look for is what we find. Learn to forgive yourself and others for being human, and know that we are all simply doing the best we can with what we have at the time.

Let go of the past for it can no longer harm you unless you give it the power to do so. Release your fear of the future, and realise that 99% of the things we worry about never, ever happen. Live in the present moment, learning to appreciate what we have, learning to trust in your own heart and intuition, making each moment count, and realising that paying more attention to our life as it unfolds, allows us to enjoy the journey, and create the perfect future that we want.

Realise that there are no mistakes in life, only lessons, that you are perfect in every way, that your life is blessed, and that you are at the exact place that you are meant to be, for this stage of your spiritual development. That your life is as it should be. Trust in yourself, and trust in the Universe to take care of you. You were chosen, you are special, you are loved.

Now you may like to recite the Reiki Precepts, or some special affirmations.

Now slowly, as I count to 5, I would like you to come back to this present place and time, bringing with you these feelings of calmness, peace and relaxation.

1. You are now aware of the sound of music (or perhaps birds or traffic) in the distance.

2. You are now aware of the carpet as it cradles and supports your body.

3. You are now aware of the air as you breathe it into you body to support you life.

4. You are now aware of the sound of my voice, as I bring your attention back to this present place and time.

5. Slowly now, I’d like you to bring your attention to this present time and place. Take a big breath in, taking your hands above your head, and stretching from the tips of your fingers to the tips of your toes. Now as you breathe out, bring your knees into your chest, and give them a big hug. You may now return to a seated position whenever you’re ready, bringing these feelings of love, kindness, compassion and peace, back with you into your day, and into your life!

Developing Your Reiki Practice By William Lee Rand People coming to you with many different problems, difficulties and illnesses sometimes as a last resort. Watching them leave relaxed, often radiant with joy and new hope. Seeing them improve over time, watching them grow, gain confidence and become more trusting of life. Seeing some make major changes and life adjustments. Occasionally witnessing miracles. Feeling the wonder of God s love pass through you and into another. Sensing the presence of spiritual beings, feeling their touch, knowing they work with you. Being raised into ever greater levels of joy and peace by simply placing your hands on another. Watching your life grow and develop as your continual immersion in Reiki transforms your attitudes, values and beliefs. Sensing that because of your commitment to help others, beings of light are focusing their love and healing on you and carefully guiding you on your spiritual path. This is the promise of a developing Reiki practice.

Reiki is a truly wonderful gift and while some take Reiki training to use on themselves and with friends and family, many feel inspired to share it with a much wider circle. The development of a Reiki practice can be a very rewarding experience. Not only can it provide you with a source of income; there are spiritual experiences that can be much more meaningful. So, assuming you

Page 55: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 55

have been initiated into Reiki and have the ability to channel Reiki healing energy to others, I would like to share some ideas and techniques that may be helpful in developing a Reiki practice.

The most important thing concerning the development of a Reiki practice is the quality and strength of your intention. The mind is like a magnet. The quality and strength of your thoughts will determine the quality and strength of what you attract into your life. Therefore it is important for you to develop and maintain a positive mental attitude about your Reiki practice.

Decide with clarity, determination and commitment that you are going to create a thriving Reiki practice. Decide that you are worthy to do this and that there are many people who will benefit from your service. Decide that the value you and your clients will receive from your Reiki practice will far out weigh any effort or sacrifice that might be involved in creating it. Picture in your mind the results you want to create and how it will feel when you are actively involved in a thriving Reiki practice. Meditate frequently on this image and these feelings. Allow them to fill you up and surround you and reach out to others. Use this to motivate you and to help you continue on in the face of doubt or discouragement. Know in your heart that the freedom, joy and satisfaction of having your own Reiki practice is a valid goal and that you are creating it. Believe in yourself and in your purpose.

If doubts arise about your goal, know that this is normal and assume that they have entered your consciousness because they are passing out of you. Whenever we take on a new level of healing or commit to a new goal, old negative thoughts and feelings that have been stored inside and have gone unchallenged are dislodged and begin moving through our consciousness. If your commitment is strong, these old negative feelings and thoughts will break up and be released. If you feel negative feelings and thoughts come up, know that this is part of your healing and that you are releasing them up to the Higher Power to be healed. Use your Reiki to speed this up and make sure to ask for treatments from others. Reiki psychic surgery can be especially helpful.

There are higher sources of help you can call on. Angels, beings of light and Reiki spirit guides as well as your own enlightened self are available to help you. They can help you develop your Reiki practice by directing clients to you and assisting with treatments. They can be of great benefit, but you must have a strong spiritual intention for your work if you are to recruit their aid. If you are doing Reiki in a selfish way, only for money or to gain control over others or to take on an air of self-importance, or for any other negative purpose, then it will be very difficult for these spiritual beings to work with you. There must be congruence, an alignment within you in order for the Higher Power in the form of Reiki to flow through you in a powerful way and in order for the angels, Reiki spirit guides and other spiritual beings to work with you. Reiki wants only the best for you, but you must align with the nature of Reiki if you are to gain the greatest benefit. The more you can open to the true nature of Reiki which is to have an unselfish heart centred desire to help others, then the more the Reiki spirit guides can help you. Focus on helping others and on healing anything within yourself that may stand in the way of an uninhibited flow of love and compassion. This is what will make your Reiki practice a success!

The development of a spiritual attitude toward your Reiki practice can be facilitated through the regular use of affirmations and prayers. Try the following prayer: "Guide me and heal me so that I can be of greater service to others." By sincerely saying a prayer such as this each day, your heart will open and a path will be created to receive the help of higher spiritual beings. They will guide you in your Reiki practice and in the development of your life purpose.

One thing that can get in the way of developing a spiritual attitude about your Reiki practice is fear of competition. This has caused more problems and created more restrictions and negative energy in the Reiki community than any other area of misunderstanding. Lack is an illusion and this is especially true for Reiki! There is a far greater need for healing on the planet than there are Reiki practitioners who can provide it. Fear of competition goes directly against the nature of Reiki energy and because of this, it can repel people from you who might otherwise be interested in receiving a treatment. Reiki comes from an unlimited supply and does not fear

Page 56: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 56

competition. People who do Reiki together find that their Reiki gets stronger as more people join the group. If Reiki was competitive, then just the opposite would happen, it would be strongest when you were alone and get weaker as more people joined the group.

The nature of Reiki energy is one of cooperation. It understands the concept that we are all one and flows freely to anyone and everyone. It works in harmony with all other forms of treatment. It is clearly apparent, the wisdom of Reiki is to welcome all other practitioners as allies. If the spiritual purpose for your Reiki practice is to help others and to heal the planet, then you can only rejoice when you hear about another Reiki practitioner in your area as they are helping you fulfil your purpose. Accept the wisdom of Reiki as your own wisdom, that all others who practice Reiki are helping you. The more you can do this, the more your Reiki practice will thrive. Don t worry about taking clients away from other practitioners. Each practitioner has their own value and special way of helping others. You will attract the clients who are right for you. Others will attract the clients who are right for them.

An important trend is developing in society that will soon create a great demand for Reiki practitioners. More and more people are discovering the value of alternative therapy. A recent study conducted by Dr. David M. Eisenberg of Boson s Beth Israel Hospital indicates that people in the US are beginning to turn away from modern medicine and make greater use of alternative health care techniques. The survey concluded that 34 percent of Americans said they used at least one alternative therapy in 1990 and that Americans are spending nearly $14 billion a year for this treatment, most of which comes out of the patients own pocket. The therapies most used are meditation, touch therapy (such as Reiki), guided imagery, spiritual healing, chiropractic, hypnosis, homeopathy, acupuncture, herbal cures, and folk remedies.

Also of note is the fact that the National Institutes of Health has created an Office of Alternative Medicine whose purpose is to research alternative healing methods and establish their value. Already this new office has proved many healing techniques formerly considered quackery by the medical establishment valid. These include chiropractic, acupuncture and homeopathy and they will soon be studying touch therapy and Reiki. Clearly, a paradigm shift is taking place toward the general acceptance of alternative medical treatment. It is likely that Reiki will become widely accepted as a valid form of healing before the end of the decade! Think what this means for anyone with a Reiki practice. A great need is developing for Reiki practitioners!

Now that we have covered some of the important attitudes, values and beliefs necessary for a thriving Reiki practice, lets discuss some of the practical issues. An important issue is money. Some practitioners do not charge money and this is fine if that is their decision as everyone has the right to charge whatever they want or to charge nothing at all. However, it is often better for the client if they are able to give something in return. They are not paying for the Reiki energy, which is free, but for your time and the effort you have put forth to learn Reiki. When people receive a treatment for free they often feel indebted to the practitioner and guilty feelings can develop. This creates an imbalance that can get in the way of continued treatments. Charging money allows people the freedom to come whenever they want. If you do have clients who have a money problem, you can charge them less or barter.

How much should you charge for a Reiki session? A good rule of thumb is to charge about the same for a standard Reiki session as others in your area are charging for massage. A standard Reiki session will usually last about 45 minutes to an hour and a half. When you first start charging for your sessions, you can start at a lower rate if that feels comfortable to you and increase it as your confidence and reputation grow.

Business cards are a good first step when starting your practice. They let people know you are serious about your Reiki business and make it easy for you to give people your phone number in case they want to make an appointment. It is not a good idea to place you address on the card as people may come without calling you. It is a good idea to talk to people first to get a feel for their energy, and let them know what they can expect from a Reiki session before setting up an appointment and giving them directions to your home or office.

Page 57: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 57

Flyers are also a good idea. In your flyer explain what Reiki is and the benefits it offers along with your name and phone number. You can place them on bulletin boards in health food stores and new age book stores etc. and they can be given out to prospective clients.

Beginning your Reiki practice from your home is a good idea as it will save money on start-up costs, but many practitioners have found advantages to having their own office. An office creates a professional atmosphere and lets people know that you take your work seriously. You may want to start in your home and get an office after things get going or if you can afford it, get an office right away. Consider the fact that you may want to have group activities in your office when considering the size office you want.

Make sure to get each client's name address and phone number for your mailing list. As your list grows, you can mail out flyers on up coming Reiki events or simply remind people about your practice. A good way to keep track of your clients is to use a client information form. The one in the back of "Reiki, The Healing Touch" is a good one as it includes a disclaimer, which protects you from misunderstandings about the results you promise from a Reiki session. Feel free to make copies of this form and use it in your practice. Keep your mind open to other ways of adding people with an interest in alternative healing to your mailing list. The mailing list can be an important tool in promoting your Reiki practice.

One way to let people know about your Reiki practice is to offer to exchange Reiki with other alternative therapists. This works well with massage therapists, as they are familiar with body work and often need therapy themselves. Offer to refer clients to them and ask them to do the same for you. Give them some of your flyers or business cards to display in their office.

When you are at public gatherings or around others and someone complains about an ache or pain, offer to give them Reiki. If they have never heard of Reiki before, explain that it is a Japanese form of stress reduction with many healthy benefits. If they have a metaphysical understanding you can talk about Ki and the life force etc. Talk to them on a level they can understand. Take 15 minutes or so to treat the area of concern and let them know you do this professionally and give them your card. Tell them what a complete session is like and set up an appointment if they are interested. At parties or large gatherings, the attention you attract when giving Reiki to one often creates interest in others who will want a sample treatment also. Often you end up treating several people and passing out many business cards. As you treat you can talk about Reiki and how it works. Ask the person to explain what they feel. This always creates a lot of interest. Being focused on helping the person and not on getting a client is the key to attracting people for sample treatments. However, if they are interested, a business card is appropriate.

One thing that will really attract attention for your Reiki practice is wearing a Reiki T-shirt. People will want to know what the symbols mean and this opens the door to talking about Reiki. Offer to give them a sample treatment and telling them about your practice. If they seem interested, give them a business card and if possible, set-up an appointment.

A free Reiki evening can create lots of interest. Plan one night a month to talk about Reiki and give sample treatments. If you have Reiki friends, ask them to come and help give treatments. This is a great way to help others and let them know about Reiki and your practice. Make up flyers for your free Reiki evening and put them up in appropriate places. If the Reiki practitioners can meet an hour or so before the meeting to give treatments to each other it will really improve the quality of what the non-Reiki people receive. Also, if you have taken Reiki III / master training, you could give a refresher attunement or healing attunement to each of the practitioners to boost their energy. This is a great way for the practitioners to practice their Reiki and for you to practice giving attunements. Call everyone you know who would be interested and let them know.

If your area has psychic or holistic fairs, get a booth. Take a Reiki table and ask 5 or more of your Reiki friends to help. Offer 10 or 15 minute treatments with 5 or more Reiki practitioners giving a treatment to one person at a time. Charge $20.00 or so per treatment. This can be a

Page 58: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 58

powerful healing experience and a good demonstration of Reiki. Have a table with your flyers and business cards on it and be sure to get each person’s name, address, and phone number for your mailing list. Another way is to use chairs and have one or two practitioners give 10 or 15 minute treatments to each person. The chair method takes up less space and allows you to treat more then one person at a time.

Create a healing service at your church. Recruit other healers to help. You could use both Reiki and non-Reiki healers. This can create tremendous interest in Reiki. Refer to the Summer 93 issue of the Reiki News for a complete explanation.

Volunteer to do free Reiki treatments at hospitals, hospice centres, drug and alcohol treatment centres or in conjunctions with a psychologist or other therapists. By doing this, you will gain experience and people will find out about your practice, but most of all, you will be helping others.

If there is a metaphysical/holistic paper in your area, offer to write an article for it on Reiki or healing in general. Make sure your name and phone number is listed and that you are a Reiki practitioner or teacher. If you are really serious, decide to write an article every month. This will let people know who you are and what your attitudes and beliefs are concerning healing. They will then be able to decide if they want to come to you. It is also a good idea to place an ad in the same paper your article appears in. You will pay for the ad, but the article will be free!

Write articles for the Reiki News or send in a description of your Reiki experiences. The Reiki News needs articles and is very interested in letting people know about your personal experiences with Reiki. It goes out to over 1800 people interested in Reiki all over the country. Having your name in the paper will improve your reputation especially if you place free copies in your local health and new age bookstores and hand out copies to your clients and friends etc.

Develop a Reiki talk and offer to speak about Reiki to local groups. There are many groups looking for speakers and alternative healing is becoming a hot topic. If you have little experience at public speaking, you can join a local Toast Masters Club. There you will be coached and given ample opportunity to develop your speaking ability. If you are making Reiki your career, then the ability to speak before groups is a must. Decide to become a great speaker and go for it.

Strengthening Your Reiki Energy By William Lee Rand

The strength and value of the Reiki treatments you give can be improved by observing some simple guidelines. There are other things you can also do that will increase the strength of our Reiki. Remember that Reiki comes from an unlimited supply and contains the loving wisdom of the highest spiritual power. There is no limit to the benefit and value that is possible for you to receive from Reiki. As you try the techniques in this article, intend that they will work for you and know in your heart that this is right and you will get the improved results you seek.

The quality of the energy in the room you do your Reiki treatments in is important if improved results are what you seek. Make sure the room is not too hot or too cool. Make sure there is fresh air from an open window or that the room is not stuffy. A clean and orderly room is also helpful as negative psychic energy tends to collect around disorder and clutter Smudge the room with sage before and after a treatment to release any negative energies left by past clients and to act as a blessing. As you smudge, call in the ancestors and the ascended masters and Reiki guides asking them to bless you and your client and to help you with your healing treatment. Place pictures of Dr. Usui, Dr. Hayashi, and Mrs. Takata around the room and ask them to be present also. The use of incense, essential oils or fresh flowers will also act to raise the vibration. Soothing music during the treatment will help the client move into a more receptive state of mind.

Before the client comes, sit in a meditative state with your hands on your legs doing Reiki on yourself. Then after a few minutes, use your dominate hand to intently draw the Reiki Power

Page 59: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 59

symbol in light on each wall, and on the ceiling and floor. As you do this state "I bless this room with light" three times for each place. Then draw the power symbol in the centre of the room and send Reiki into the room to fill the room with healing energy. You can also send distant Reiki to your client while they are on their way to the session so they will be relaxed and in a receptive state when they arrive.

Before starting the treatment, place the power and master symbols on your palm chakras. This will more completely open the palm chakras and energise them. Then draw a large power symbol down the front of your body to protect and empower you and draw smaller power symbols on each chakra. Placing the symbols into the clients crown chakra, and seeing them pass into the clients heart is also valuable before starting as it raises the vibration of the treatment and makes the energy of the symbols more available.

It is an interesting feature of Reiki that when giving a treatment, Reiki will continue to flow regardless of what you do with your mind. You can talk to others about any subject - including trivial matters, or gossip or even talk on the phone and Reiki will continue to flow and the client will receive some benefit. However, this sort of behaviour does not produce the best results with Reiki. It must be kept in mind that giving Reiki is a spiritual experience and is more appropriately given with reverence. By meditating on the flow of Reiki as it passes through you, rather than talking, you will not only experience the energy more directly, but will also increase its flow. As you meditate on the Reiki energy, your mind merges with it and causes your energy field to resonate in greater harmony with the flow of Reiki, thus allowing it to flow more freely. As you do this, you may feel currents of energy flowing through various parts of your body including your spine, chakras, arms and hands. You may also feel heat, soothing sensations, vibrations, pulsations or waves of energy passing through you. By using your inner eye, you may also be able to see the Reiki energy. This may appear as tiny particles of white or golden light, or other colours of energy flowing through you. As you meditate and merge with these sensations, your mind will be uplifted, becoming more optimistic. Feelings of joy, peace and spiritual love will be experienced. Wonderfully positive fantasies and visions of higher spiritual planes can also be experienced. By going inward and looking up through your crown chakra, it is even possible to psychically travel up to the source of Reiki and merge with it. All these experiences are very enjoyable and can be deeply healing for the practitioner at the same time that they increase the benefit to the client. As you meditate on Reiki in this way, you will also be opening the pathways through which Reiki is able to flow, thus increasing the strength of Reiki you are channelling to your client. This is a very enjoyable way to improve the quality of the Reiki you give. Adding prayer to your Reiki treatments is also an effective way to increase its strength. While your are giving a treatment, you can pray out loud or to yourself. Call on the ascended Reiki masters, or on Jesus, St. Germain, Buddha, Krishna, Babaji, or other ascended masters, angels, or spirit guides, or pray directly to the infinite God/Goddess or to the Reiki energy itself. As you pray, ask that your Reiki be strengthened and ask it to bless you and your client. Ask it to bless and guide your Reiki practice and to guide you in increasing its strength and the benefit it provides you and those you treat. Accept the fact that there is no limit to the value and healing power that is available to you and ask that you be blessed with an abundance of healing, loving spiritual energy so that you will be of greater service to others. Combine your prayers with the above technique of merging with the energy and feeling it as it flows through you. By praying as you do Reiki, your prayers will be more powerful because when doing Reiki, you are more directly connected to the higher power which is the source of all answered prayer.

Attracting a special healing guide(s) that will work with you will also improve your treatments. While Reiki comes directly from God, there are spiritual guides who are adept at healing. They can add their Reiki energies to yours and also channel Reiki directly to the client. Many have reported that they felt additional hands on them and the presence of someone else in the room during a Reiki treatment. Having a sincere desire to help and praying that a healing guide or angel will come to help you can bring this about. Also, using the "Meet Your Reiki Guides" tape listed in the newsletter can create this connection.

Page 60: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 60

Some Reiki practitioners report that their Reiki seems to have lost some of its power and they wonder why this happens and what can be done to get it back. It is a fact that when doing Reiki, the practitioner also receives a treatment. When this happens, sometimes negative energy is loosened and begins to move through the practitioners system on its way out. This energy can sometimes get stuck temporarily so that ones Reiki tends to work on the practitioner more than flowing to others. What is needed is for the practitioner to receive a treatment. This will release the blocked energy and restore the flow of Reiki. Remember, we need to maintain a balance of Reiki by treating ourselves, giving treatments to others and receiving treatments from others.

Your Reiki can also increase when you take your next level of Reiki training. The attunement for the next level and the use of the symbol(s) that go with it can definitely improve the quality of your Reiki treatments. This is regularly reported to occur by most students. One practitioner reported that his wife was in continuous pain, which was only partially and temporally removed with his Reiki II treatments. After taking the Master training, one treatment using the Master symbol completely released the pain and it didn't return. Your Reiki can also improve by receiving additional attunements for the same level you already have. Even though you need only one attunement to have Reiki for the rest of your life, extra attunements for the same level you have will further refine and strengthen your Reiki. Many Masters will give extra attunements for free or for a low fee. Sometimes new Masters need people to practice on, go ahead and volunteer. A group of Masters can practice attunements on each other and strengthen their Reiki at the same time. Have each Master give the Master attunement to each person in the group. If you have five Masters, then each will receive four Master attunements and give four. This can be very powerful.

Chi Gong and Tai Chi are methods of developing your Chi and opening the pathways that Chi or Ki flows through. The pathways that are opened in these exercises are the same ones that Reiki flows through. On the average, most people who have practiced this type of moving meditation have stronger Reiki than those who have not. Find a teacher you feel comfortable with and take up the regular practice of Chi Gong or Tai Chi and not only will it be healthy for you, but your Reiki will also improve.

It is possible to use self-hypnosis and meditation as well as affirmations to improve your Reiki. Simply enter self-hypnosis or meditation and suggest to yourself that your Reiki is getting stronger and stronger and stronger and it will. You can also do this while giving a treatment.

Playing the "Chanting Reiki Masters" tape while give a treatment can also improved the value of your Reiki. The tape was made by 18 Reiki Masters who chanted the names of all four Reiki symbols into a microphone while intending that all who hear the sound will be healed. Most who play the tape while giving a treatment notice an improvement in the quality of their Reiki.

Placing sacred pictures in your Reiki room when you are doing Reiki can also increase the value of your treatments. This includes pictures of Jesus, Buddha, Krishna or any other spiritual teacher or great being. The Beaming Reiki Masters picture in the back of "Reiki, The Healing Touch" will also raise the vibration of your treatments as well as the Antakarana that is given in the Master training. You can place these cards under your Reiki table or on the wall of your healing room.

These are a few methods of improving the strength of your Reiki. Try them. Also remember that Reiki has it's own consciousness and by simply intending to find ways to improve the value you pass on to others with your treatments, and by being open to its guidance, the Reiki energy will guide you to additional ways. Reiki comes from an infinite supply. There is no limit to the healing power that is available to you. Focus on love and compassion. Trust in your inner guidance and take action on it. You will not be disappointed.

Page 61: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 61

Non-Traditional Reiki Add-Ons Usui Tibetan Reiki Level IIIa

The Usui Tibetan Level IIIa was developed by Western Reiki Teachers since 1980. It was conceived of and is called a level of "Personal Mastery". It is often taught as "advanced Reiki" but in reality is neither advanced nor technically is it Reiki. It is rather a number of new age add-on techniques. (Alice Bailey, Hermetic Magik, Wicca, Shaminism, Crystal use and/or magick, and various channelled materials.) These techniques and other methods are not Tibetan and not from any Japanese Reiki lineage. Many people loosely group these together as "non-traditional" Reiki. The most common of these are a Reiki Symbol Meditation, a Goal Manifestation Technique, a Reiki Crystal Grid, a Technique to meet your "Reiki Guides", a Healing Attunement, a Psychic Surgery Technique, and the Antahkarana symbol and Meditation.

Most of this material comes from one of three sources. The first would be from Arthur Robertson and his Raku Kei Reiki. Mr Robertson was a student of Iris Ishikuro who was one of Takata's masters. Mr Robertson was the first to change from Mrs Takata's teachings and add in the so-called "Tibetan" material. William Rand was the second to significantly deviate from Mrs Takata's teachings and incorporate this "Tibetan" material. Diane Stein is the other main source of this material in her book "Essential Reiki".

I have often seen that teaching level IIIa claim that the level IIIa class "deepens the connection with the Reiki Source". Some say "people who take level IIIa are better healers", or "most people do not want to teach and so this level of 'personal mastery' enables them to practice more fully as Reiki practitioners". Reiki IS. It is the nature of Reiki to always do what is needed, to do what must be done rather than what our ego desires it to do. Remember that all energy comes from the same source. Reiki is Reiki!

Your intention is always the most important issue. Leave the ego behind. If these add-ons fit in with your way of thinking, feel free to use them, but remember, they are not necessary to do Reiki. Trust in your intuition, and know that by letting go, we allow the Reiki to do its work for everyone’s highest good.

Reiki Advanced Techniques (R.A.T.) OR Techniques of Advanced Reiki (T.A.R.)

Reiki "Advanced" Techniques ( R.A.T.) or Techniques of Advanced Reiki (T.A.R.) are techniques added to traditional Usui Reiki from a number of sources, as previously discussed. These techniques are neither advanced, necessary or technically Reiki. During the time that Mrs Takata was teaching, the practice of Usui Shiki Ryoho Reiki in America, was consistent and fairly standardised. Mrs Takata died in 1980. After Mrs Takata's death, people began to question pricing and various practices in Reiki. The first major influence, as previously stated was from Arthur Robertson. It was he that changed the attunement structure, added in the "Tibetan" symbols, the macrocosmic orbit (i.e., Hui Yin), the Breath of the Fire Dragon (also known as the Golden Breath of Violet Breath) and the Kidney breaths. Others added additional material.

Many people that practice Reiki, have in their searching experienced other systems on their journey. These might include Wicca, Hermetic Magic, Kaballah, Crystals, Meditation, Tibetan Buddhist Practices, and everything in between. Some Reiki Masters began experimenting with this simple art of Reiki, and adding everything under the sun into it. New symbols were added. New styles emerged. Styles such as Usui/Tibetan Reiki, Vajra Reiki (was Johre Reiki), Blue Star

Reiki, Karuna Reiki, Tera Mai Reiki, Seichim Reiki, Lightarian Reiki Siddheartha Reiki, and more. Some added new symbols, others modified the attunement process, still others changed the focus from a healing art to a tool for ascension work or self-development. Some of these arts claim to be "higher frequency energy", or "more powerful", or even enlightenment producing!

Page 62: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 62

Understand that none of these techniques are necessary to practice Reiki effectively, and none of them were used in Japan. Some Reiki Masters question the validity of these practices, or the inclusion of them under the descriptions of "Reiki". I will list some of the more common modifications and Reiki Advanced Practices (R.A.T.) here, as well as some other Techniques of Advanced Reiki (T.A.R.). Try them if you choose. If you find them useful, add them to your practices. Here you will find some of what are commonly referred to as "advanced" techniques.

Reiki Symbol Meditation Reiki Symbol Meditation is meditation using the Reiki Symbols. It is a hybrid of meditation and visualisation that is half attunement and half meditation. It is designed to increase the connection to the Reiki source by meditating on the symbols. Knowing this is the process, those of you who are familiar with meditation could easily fashion your own meditation on the symbols, visualising the symbols and meditating on the connection to the Reiki source. Experiment and explore. These practices are not written in stone, and were developed by other people, just like you. Their ways are no better (or no worse?!!) than yours.

To do this meditation, use guidelines that anyone doing meditation of any sort might follow. Get yourself into a comfortable position. Sitting in a comfortable chair that allows your spine to be erect is a good idea. Placing your hands on your lap and having your feet comfortably touch the floor generally works well. You may also wish to simply lie down with your spine straight. Relaxing the body using some deep breathing, or muscular relaxation can sometimes help.

As with all meditation, if your mind wanders while meditating, simply observe them, then allow the thoughts to slip away, paying them no mind, and gently refocus. Having done that, breathe slowly and deeply, shut your eyes and focus on the feeling of Reiki. Sometimes it helps to allow that sensation to begin in your palms. Allow the Reiki to pour into you and intend that it do so. Let your mind stay on this sensation and feeling. Now allow the loving feel of the Reiki Source to be with you as the Reiki energy flows into you. Stay with this feeling for a time and then when you are ready, you can begin to meditate on the symbols.

The first symbol we will use is the Master symbol. Either draw it in front of you or visualise it in your mind. Say the name of the symbol (either out loud or in your head). Visualise the symbol as golden, intensely bright and empowered with the loving energy of the Reiki source. Allow it to flow into you, and for any message it might have for you to manifest. Stay focused on the symbol and the Reiki flow and the source. The Master symbol is the symbol of empowerment, and of the Great Shining Light. Allow the symbol and energy to show you what that means. Stay with this as long as you feel comfortable.

When you are ready, do the same with the Power Symbol, the Mental/Emotional Symbol, and the Distance Symbol. You can do the meditation with all four symbols in one setting, or perhaps only work with one symbol per session, and increase the time meditating on that symbol. The connection feels more personal that way.

When you are finished, draw all four symbols in front of you saying their names. Thank the Reiki source for sharing this with you. At this point, you are likely to be filled with energy and this would be a good time to work on doing self-treatments, treating others, doing distant healing, manifesting goals or charging your Reiki crystals. However, grounding yourself is important! If you are not grounded, you might find yourself light headed and dizzy after this meditation. Find something that is grounding and do it. You can place your palms on the earth, go for a walk, visualise roots running to the centre of the earth and connecting, drink water or whatever works for you. You can also put your tongue on the soft palate (just behind the teeth), draw the power symbol on the feet, the hara (just below the naval) and the palms. Place your palms on the hara and concentrate on that area for a few minutes. This tends to bring the excess energy from the upper chakras and into the hara. Any method of grounding works and keeps the ‘dizzies’ from happening!

Page 63: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 63

There are an infinite number of possibilities of Reiki Meditations available. You can do it focusing only on the connection to the Reiki source. You can add other meditative practices such as light body meditations. Experiment and know that your modifications are just as good and valid as anyone else's, they just cost less!

The Hui Yin and the Violet Breath The Hui Yin and Violet Breath are generally not considered Traditional Techniques. You can pass attunements either using them or not. Some people feel the attunements feel more powerful when using these techniques. This is most likely because the Hui Yin is a chi kung technique called the Microcosmic Orbit. When using this, your chi becomes part of the mix while doing an attunement. Some say that the attunements "feel" stronger when doing them this way. I suggest that you experiment and see.

The Microcosmic Orbit

Showing the yin (descending, in black), and yang (ascending, flame) points.

Page 64: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 64

Page 65: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 65

The 'Microcosmic Orbit' One of the most important basic qigong exercises is called Microcosmic Orbit Breathing. This exercise is not complicated or difficult, and provides excellent benefits to those who use it.

Background Information

In acupuncture, there are twelve main energy channels called meridians or 'jing-luo' in Chinese. In addition there are numerous other categories of meridians. One of these others is a set of meridians called Extraordinary Vessels.

Of the Extraordinary Vessels, two stand out as being the most important. These are the Du Mai (Governing Vessel), which runs from the base of the spine up the centre of the back and over the centre top of the head, and the Ren Mai (Conception Vessel), which runs along the middle of the front of the torso.

Together, these energy channels are responsible for the balancing of the Yang, active, fiery energies in the body with the Yin, cool, nourishing energies. You have probably seen the symbol which represents this balance:

The Exercise

For the Microcosmic Orbit, the red portion of this image represents the fiery Governing Vessel travelling up the spine and over the head, while the blue portion represents the cool, watery Conception Vessel travelling down the centre front of the torso.

The very simplest version of the exercise goes like this: As you inhale, imagine the energy flowing up the centre of your back to the top of your head. As you exhale, imagine the energy flowing down your face and down the centre front of your torso. Breathe in a deep, slow, relaxed manner while doing this. Generally, 15-20 minutes of quiet sitting and breathing in this manner are practiced once a day.

There are more elaborate versions of this exercise which go into greater detail of the pathways, specific focal points along the meridians, and other levels at which the exercise is effective, however, even this basic version of the exercise is still quite helpful.

The Hui Yin The Hui Yin point is located between the anus and the genitals. To do the technique, the point is contracted, and the tongue is placed against the soft palate (behind the upper teeth. I have seen some Masters speculate that when using the Hui Yin and Violet Breath when passing Attunements, a special type of high frequency Chi enters the system and passes through the Hui Yin point, making this a more powerful process. Some masters go so far as to speculate that this point must be held for the entire time you are doing the Attunements to prevent the Ki from escaping from this point. As with all speculation of this type, no one really knows what the veracity of such claims are. All I can offer is that Usui did not use this process. If you are going to use the Hui Yin, you must practice to develop the muscular control to hold the point for lengthy periods.

To develop this muscle, practice contracting the muscles in this area. Pull gently! Do not strain and hurt yourself! You can also practice contracting these muscles continuously as you go about your daily activities. As you continue practicing, it will become easier and you will be able to hold them for longer periods of time.

Page 66: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 66

The Violet Breath Visualise a White Mist surrounding you. Next, contract the Hui Yin point and place your tongue behind the upper teeth. Breath in and imagine a white Light coming down through the crown Chakra, through the tongue, down the front of the body (Functional channel), through the Hui Yin point and up the spine (Governing channel), to the centre of the head. Imagine the white mist filling the head. (This is commonly referred to as the Microcosmic Orbit). Now, visualise the white Mist turn blue, then indigo blue and begin rotating clockwise. As the Mist rotates see it turn to Violet. In the Violet Light/Mist visualise the Dumo (see it as golden). During the attunement, blow the Dumo Symbol and Violet breath into the student’s crown Chakra and imagine the Symbol moving into the base of the brain as you say the name of the symbol in your mind.

Manifesting Goals Goal Manifestation is another new age technique that is also common in Magick and Wicca. It is an active utilisation that focuses on the desires of ego to get what one wants or bring about some desired outcome. Because these represent attachment in Buddhist thought, they would seem to be incongruous with the gentle art of Reiki, where one does by not doing. No attachment to the outcome is a maxim in all styles in Reiki. This technique would seem to not be in concurrence with this, however if the goal is for everyone’s highest good, there should be no harm in doing so. There is no reason we cannot all have a happy, fulfilled, life, with prosperity in all areas!

The Manifestation Grid was taught in Level 2. There are several methods available to help use Reiki and the Reiki symbols to manifest goals. Advocates of these techniques feel that they can help manifest changes in your life. Manifestation practices can be done alone, or after doing a Reiki Meditation like the one described above. No matter what method you use to manifest goals, always be ethical in what you ask for.

Sit and relax, breathing gently and deeply. Either out loud or to yourself, say your goal. State it in such a way that there can only be one interpretation and cannot be misinterpreted. Connect to the Reiki energy. Draw the symbols on your palms. In your mind, create a mental movie, or mental image of this goal being accomplished. Draw the Reiki symbols on the mental picture starting with the power symbol and ending with the power symbol. Repeat this same procedure for each goal you wish to accomplish. When you are finished, say (out loud or in your mind) "If this be possible within Divine love and wisdom, then let it be so." Finish by drawing all the Reiki symbols again on the visualisation and sealing it with a power symbol. Believe totally that this process is done and that this goal is already being manifested.

Another Manifestation technique is a Manifestation Triangle. This technique is a better choice for those who are not as good with visualisation techniques. Also, because it involves writing, it is more concrete and can help focus you on what you truly want. The first step is to draw a triangle. At the bottom left hand corner write the person's name that this manifestation is to be for (you or someone else). Next, at the top of the triangle, write what you want to happen. This should be the best possible solution to the situation. The situation and person's name should be specific. You can say "This will manifest for the highest good of (person's name)". Next, at the bottom right hand corner, write the situation. After setting up your triangle, and writing out the name, solution and situation, draw a power symbol over each corner. Draw a power symbol over the whole triangle. Place your hands on the triangle picture and do Reiki on it, intending it to manifest.

Reiki Crystal Grid The Crystal Grid was also taught in Level 2 Reiki. In this technique, a crystal grid can be created and charged with Reiki energy. These techniques seem to come from new age crystal practices, and from spell work and magick. It is thought that it will continue to send Reiki energy

Page 67: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 67

for healing, protection, or to assist with goal manifestation for several days or longer. The idea of using charged objects to bring about a desired outcome for the user or wearer is nothing new. Talismans have been used throughout recorded history. These techniques are generally from magical traditions. Psychologists believe that there is a self-fulfilling prophecy regarding the wearing of such objects as well as a placebo effect.

This technique was developed to set up a continuous flow of Reiki energy for healing or protection by using crystals and the Reiki energy. This technique did not exist in Reiki Ryoho in Japan, and was not part of the Hayashi-Takata Usui Shiki Ryoho, but like most of the add-ons were developed after the death of Mrs Takata.

To make the Reiki Grid you need eight crystals. (There are many books on crystal selection with rather lengthy guidelines about how to select the "perfect" crystal for you.) For our purposes, the easiest method of crystal selection is to pick the crystals up and just see how they feel to you. Try not to so much "think" about this as "feel" it. Send some Reiki into the crystal and see how that feels as well, allowing your intuition to guide you. Most new age shops and many science or hobby shops sell crystals. Regular Rose Quartz, or White Quartz tumbled smooth stones are sufficient for the purpose of making this grid and are inexpensive.

You will also need a picture of the person that the grid will send to or protect.

After you have the stones, they will need to be cleansed. Some crystal experts believe you should cleanse them in clear water and then leave them in the sun and moon light for a period of three days. Other experts believe it is best to place them in rock or sea salt or salt water for 24 hours. Say a prayer over them after you have put them in the salt or salt water, asking that they be purified for your highest spiritual good.

Choose a place for the Reiki Grid. The best location is one where others do not go so that the grid is not disturbed. Take the eight crystals that you have cleansed, and choose the one that seems the strongest. This will be the Master Charging Crystal. For your central (Master) crystal, you may want to choose a double terminated crystal, a cluster, a pyramid or a crystal ball. (Some practitioners conceptualise this in terms of yin and yang. You are looking for the crystal that is the most yang, or has the strongest male energy.) Next, place six of the crystals at equal points around a circle about 10 to 12inches in diameter. This creates a hexagon or six-sided figure. Place the last crystal in the centre. This makes seven stones in the design in total. The eighth will be used as the Master crystal. Play with the arrangement until it feels right.

This arrangement uses a six-sided figure. It is possible to construct them in any geometric shape. Various Magick traditions such as Wicca and Hermetic Magick attribute different meanings to the various shapes. Choose one that best represents what you are trying to accomplish.

Take a picture of yourself or the person that you want to send Reiki to. Draw the four Reiki Symbols on the back, the person's name, and an affirmation to help empower and set the intent of the process. Be creative. You can use a piece of paper with a goal, intent or need on it instead of a picture. Draw out the four Reiki Symbols on the paper and then Reiki it between your hands and place it within the crystal Grid. The belief is that the Grid will continuously send Reiki to heal the person or bring about the goal.

At this point you have the purified crystals and your prepared picture. The next step is to charge the crystals with the Reiki energy. This is very simple to do. Take each crystal into the palm of your hands, and send Reiki into it for about 10 minutes or so. Do this with each crystal, one at a time until all of them are done. You can also say prayers, or ask your Reiki or spiritual guides to assist you while you are charging them. Another way to charge them is to do a Reiki Attunement on each crystal or do an attunement on the grid once it is completed.

Once the crystals are charged put each back in its place on the grid. Put the Master Crystal in last. It is suggested that you not move the crystals after they are in place as it will weaken the energy connections.

Page 68: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 68

The Master Crystal is used to keep your Reiki Grid charged. This stone can be recharged when needed by holding it in the hand during a Reiki meditation, beaming Reiki into it, or re-attuning it. To finish the grid, hold the Master crystal in your right hand. Starting at the top, begin to connect the dots that are formed by the crystals on the grid. You will be starting at the top and making six triangles as you connect the imaginary lines between the stones on the outside and the centre stone. Move around the Grid in a counter clockwise direction. You can also say an affirmation or mantra as you do this. Some masters meditate with the Master Crystal frequently to keep their Reiki Grid charged up.

Reiki Guide Meditation This technique is commonly taught in the Level IIIa classes of the Usui/Tibetan School and has been popularised by authors such as William Rand and Diane Stein. Reiki Guides were not part of Traditional Reiki as taught by Usui. Like most of the "add-on" material, Reiki Guides and the belief in them were added on by other masters in the west after the death of Mrs Takata and were never used by Usui. This material seems to have been taken from various Native American Shaman traditions.

Understand that Reiki works without "guides" and that guides are not necessary to practicing Reiki, or doing attunements. Many people use Reiki their entire lives without ever having a guide. There are some authors believe that Reiki "guides" are really the ones that do Reiki, and are the presence doing the attunements and will correct errors made by the Reiki Master during an attunement. Reiki "guides" again lead us to look outside ourselves, to wonder what the "guides" want. To wonder and worry about what the "guides" are trying to tell us. We anthropomorphise our intuition, needs and wants and then look to that to tell us our answers and move away from BE-ing Reiki, to surrendering our conditioned self to more conditioning. I do not use guides in my practice, although many do.

Like all meditation practices, find a time alone and a place without distractions. Sit comfortably in a straight-backed chair with your hands on your thighs. As you breathe in, see the breath as white light filling every part of your body. As the white light goes through your body with your breath, it collects this tension and is blown out of you with the release of the breath.

Visualise a fountain of white Light descending down over you. This light flows over you and down to the ground. As it touches your energy it collects the negative energy and everything that is not for your highest good. The Reiki Light transmutes the negative energy into light. Allow the light to form a protective bubble around you. You are completely surrounded by this bubble of light and you feel safe and protected.

Do some form of systematic muscular relaxation:

Allow the relaxation to come into the soles of both of your feet at the same time. Feel your feet relax. Let the relaxing sensation move up the legs into the ankles, letting the muscles and bones relax. The relaxing energy moves up the legs into the calves, relaxing them, and then up through the knees into the thighs. Allow the legs to totally relax, and then let the energy move up into the hips, relaxing the hips. And your legs and hips are totally relaxed. Now let the relaxing power move up the spine, and a warm feeling of energy moves up the spine as it relaxes the muscles of the back. The energy moves into the shoulders, and you allow your shoulders to relax. The energy now moves down the arms, and into the hands, relaxing your upper arms, fore arms, and hands. Now the energy moves up the neck, relaxing the muscles in the neck and up the head, into the scalp and the head and scalp are relaxed. The energy moves down over the forehead, and into the jaw, and you are totally relaxed and now ready to start the meditation to meet your guide. At this point, concentrate on the breathing and let go of all thought.

As you sit in your chair, see a beautiful column of Pure White Light, or a column of Golden Divine Light. Allow the divine light to come in your presence and then to envelop you, and be with you. As you gaze at this Light, you see a figure emerging from out of the Light and coming

Page 69: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 69

towards you. As they approach, you start to see more of what they look like. You may wish to ask them some questions to help them communicate with you. As you ask these questions and receive the answers, know that you will remember them clearly upon awakening. You will both intuit, feel, hear or otherwise receive the answers. Ask and or notice their gender, size, appearance, shape, smell, form, clothing, etc.

See them come towards you and give you a hand. Note how it feels to meet this being? Are they familiar and do you recognise them from having met them before? What does their energy feel like to you?

See them sit in front of you. Ask them their name, why they are here for you at this moment in time, what role they are to play in your life, and if they have a specific message for you at this time. Listen carefully for the answers.

When you feel comfortable with your guide and the answers have come to you, be with your guide for a time and allow the connection and communication between you to deepen.

Ask them how you can recognise their presence the next time, and how to ask them for assistance when you need it in the future. You should not share this information with anyone. Then, thank your Reiki Guide for making their presence known to you.

Know that your guide will be with you from this time forward, guiding you, protecting you, and assisting you. In the future, all you need do is acknowledge their presence and ask for their help when you need it.

Start bringing yourself back to the room where you are physically. When you open your eyes, you will awaken, refreshed, alert, and completely aware. You have now met your guide or angel. Talk to them in meditations. Call on them when you need. This can be as simple as calling their name in your mind. Also, by remember the feeling you had of them (energy signature) you can connect with them.

(Note: Be careful what spirits you ask into your life. Make your own decisions. Never surrender your will to another human or spirit. Above all else, be careful.)

Reiki Psychic Surgery Technique William Rand developed this technique. It is a pseudo-hypnosis/visualisation psychodrama technique that tries to focus a person on solving an area that they are "stuck" in and breaking up blockages. The use of "Reiki fingers" and other techniques in this procedure would seem to be Shaman techniques. A Shaman in training would study for many years prior to attempting this, which is commonly taught as an hour section of a weekend class. This technique also reminds us of some neuro-linguistic programming techniques minus the Reiki. Hypnosis and Neuro-linguistic programming are separate areas of extensive study which cannot be taught as part of a weekend "advanced Reiki" class. I do not teach this material in any of my classes.

Reiki Aura Clearing While searching for more information on Reiki psychic surgery, I came across this further information:

The presence of negative psychic energy in the body of the aura is the cause of most illness and dysfunction. Aura clearing, a Reiki technique for removing negative psychic energy, was developed.

Formerly called Reiki psychic surgery, this highly effective process uses Reiki energy to empower the hands so that practitioners can grasp negative psychic energy within or around themselves or others and send it up to the light.

The positive results of this process in healing and well-being are immediately apparent.

Page 70: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 70

Psychic surgery is a phrase with many meanings. To some it refers to drawing negative energy out of the energy field and/or the body, to others it means the removal of thought-forms, and to still others it refers to processes such as the removal of memory imprints or soul retrieval. In areas such as the Philippines psychic surgery means the literal physical removal of cysts or tumours from inside the body by use of the bare hands, with no cutting instruments, scars or healing time.

In our text we will refer to the types of psychic surgery techniques which are designed to remove negative energy or energetic clusters (such as thought-forms) from the client's energetic bodies. To do this, we will, as usual, employ means that have been tested for centuries in eastern and shamanic traditions. Many such methods are available, however all deal with essentially the same mechanics.

The first technique comes from Reiki teacher, Rev. Jeanne Greening.

Occasionally when working on someone, a healer will feel a slick, almost honey like substance, form on the skin surface of the client. To parapsychologists this is a form of ectoplasm, to healers it is a form of negative energy being released by the body.

Rather than simply wiping it off, it is best to remove it by drawing it out with action and visualisation. To do so, simply visualise darkened energy in the area where the ectoplasm has appeared. Then take one of your hands and act as if you are grasping the energy and pulling it out of the person. Actually visualise yourself pulling the energy out of the person until no blackened energy remains in your visualisation.

Each time that you grab some and pull it out, shake your hands off just as you would do if you were shaking water off of them. This will shake the negative energy off your hands. Many people believe that you should shake your hands and fling the energy directly into a substance which will contain it, such as sea salt (or sea salt saturated in pure water) or raw earth to ground it. The rational is that if you just fling it anywhere, it will build up in the space. However, our research and investigation has not found that to be the case. Once flung off the hands, the energy simply dissipates into the ethers. It does not collect in the space. In fact, shaking your hands and crystals in the manner described above is one of the most effective cleansing techniques available, and the leading one used by many clairvoyants.

Once you have cleared the person's field of the negative energy and shaken the energy off your hands for the final time, be certain to resume healing in the spot you drew the energy out from. It will most likely need to be filled in with a significant amount of healing energy. This is one of the simplest and most powerful techniques that I have found for drawing negative energy out of the body.

The Reiki Healing Attunement Background A Reiki Healing Attunement is a non-initiatory attunement that is given for healing purposes only. It was not a part of traditional Usui Reiki and as such is not necessary in the least to practice Reiki. This Attunement was conceptualised to be non-initiatory which means that it is not supposed to initiate the person receiving it into Reiki. It was thought that it would bring higher frequency energies and more powerful levels of energies into the person than a traditional hands-on treatment. The prime directive of Reiki is that we do not control the energy, Reiki does the healing not us. Reiki always works for the highest good of the recipient. So…using that as a guideline I would have to say that the healing attunement would not work any better at healing than any regular hands on treatment. Indeed, how could it? Reiki does the healing not us, and Reiki decides what is in the highest good of the person, not us, so we cannot control the energy by doing extra special healing attunements.

Please Note: This attunement is not supposed to initiate the client into Reiki. The inventors of this procedure believe that it is not an Attunement Process for conferring the status of Reiki practitioner, therefore the Reiki Master can utilise this particular process in his or her

Page 71: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 71

healing work. It is thought that the reason the Healing Attunement does not initiate the client into Reiki is that the Symbols are not placed into the hands, but instead are placed in the recipient's Heart Chakra. My experience tells me that any attunement confers the status of a Reiki practitioner on a person. (I have heard of this occurring a number of times after practitioners doing the Healing Attunement, with people contacting them days later, telling them that their hands are very hot, and that when ever they touch themselves or others they become hot and it feels relaxing and pleasant. Upon examination it appeared that they had received an attunement.) Understand full wells when giving this procedure, you are initiating someone into Reiki. If you do this and the person experiences post attunement effects, you are ethically bound to instruct them in Reiki so they understand the gift given them.

This Reiki Healing Attunement was thought to be a way for a client to be able to remove blockages and is used with a pseudo-therapeutic technique to help the person focus on the "blockage" and why it might be occurring. As with any attunement, it can remove negative energies from the client's physical body, aura and chakras. It can also help release blocks. It needs to be said that this is what any regular hands-on Reiki session or attunement does.

To utilise the "blockage releasing" potential of the Healing Attunement, or even a Reiki treatment, explain to the person that they must be willing to let go of the block as well as any other effected areas in their life related to the block. In order for it to be most effective they must be willing to let go and heal and make the necessary changes related to the block. The client's intent in the attunement should be focused on the issues relating to the block, letting go of it and healing.

This "Healing Attunement" is also conceptualised to help "empower goals". To do this, discuss with the person what goals they have had trouble achieving and what may need to be released and healed so it can be achieved. Realise that there are often unconscious fears and feelings that prevent the person from achieving the goal. Also, there can be fears that if the goal is accomplished the person may have to make changes in their life, which may be uncomfortable or frightening, and so they avoid completing that goal. These blocks and fears can be focused on and released during the healing attunement.

Reiki Tibetan/Usui Attunement Beginning

Begin by saying a "prayer" of intent, either silent or out loud. Ask for the help of the Reiki Source to do a perfect attunement for this person. If you have spirit guides, "Reiki" guides, Angels, Ascended Masters, etc., you can ask them to assist that this be a perfect attunement for this persons highest good.

Draw the Power Symbol on your palms, Crown and Heart Chakras, intending them to open to the Reiki Source and Light. Cleanse the room by drawing all six Reiki Symbols in the air in front of you (four Usui Symbols along with the Dumo and Fire Serpent).This not only can cleanse the room but sets the tone for the beginning as a sacred event. Contract the Hui Yin and hold it throughout the attunement. (Do not fret if you cannot, it will still work!)

Part One

On the back, draw the Fire Serpent from slightly above the top of the head and down the back of the student, ending at the base of the spine. Place both hands on top of the head to get an energetic rapport with the student.

Bring your tongue to behind the teeth, (remember to keep the Hui Yin Held) and do the Violet Breath. Exhale the Violet Breath into the Crown Chakra blowing the Dumo symbol in gold into the Crown Chakra, and move it through the middle of the student's head, and into the base of the brain. Repeat Dai Ko Mio three times as it is moving into the brain. You can guide it with your hand.

Page 72: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 72

Above the head, draw the Usui Master Symbol and again repeat Dai Ko Mio three times. Again visualise the symbol moving into the into the Crown Chakra, through the head and into the base of the brain, guiding it with your hand. Do the same with the Sei Hei Ki and the Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen.

Signal the student to raise their hands held in prayer position to the top of their head. Draw the Power Symbol in the air over the hands. Then picture the Symbol moving into the hands, down into the Crown Chakra, through the head, and into in the base of the brain saying the name of the power symbol three times and guiding the Symbol with your hand. (The Sei Hei Ki and the Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen are added for Level II, and the Symbols are added in level III.)

Part Two

Move to the front and place the student’s prayer-held hands in front of the heart. Draw the Power Symbol in the air in front of the middle of forehead (brow or third eye chakra). Then picture the Symbol moving into the brow chakra. Guide it in with the hand if you want. Say the name of the power symbol three times. (For Level II do the same with the Mental/Emotional Symbol and the Distant Symbol. For the Master Level, use all six symbols, remembering to repeat the name of each symbol three times).

Draw the Power Symbol in the air in front of the heart chakra. Then picture the Symbol moving into the heart chakra. Say the name of the power symbol three times. (For Level II do the same with the Mental/Emotional Symbol and the Distant Symbol. For the Master Level, use all six symbols).

Next open the student's hands like the cover of a book so they are next to each other palms up facing the ceiling. Place you left hand under their hands and with your right hand draw out the Power Symbol on the hands on the Palm. Say the name of the power symbol three times. Then lightly slap the hands three times. (Only the Power symbol is placed in the hands in level I, the Distant symbol and mental /emotional symbol are placed in the hands in level II, and all the symbols are placed in the palms in the Master level.)

Bring the student's hands together in prayer position, and move them back in front of the student's Heart. Blow over the hands, down to the Solar Plexus, then up to the Third Eye and Crown, and back over the hands.

Part Three

Move behind the student. Place your hands on the student's head. Use a positive affirmation and repeat it to yourself three times, Intend it to be accepted by the student. (Some examples might be: "You are a perfectly attuned", "you are a competent Reiki Healer", or "you are filled with Divine Love and Wisdom", or any other affirmation that is significant to you or the student. You can say them out loud if you prefer.

Open your hands and look down through the Crown Chakra, visualising through to the root chakra. Intend that the beautiful great shining light of the Reiki Source send a ball of light into the heart and fill all the chakras.

Move your hands to the student's neck, and then place the right hand on top of the head and the left at the base of the skull. Visualise a door and then draw the power symbol on it and see the door being closed. Say to yourself, "I seal this Attunement with Divine Love and Wisdom". Intend that the Process is sealed and complete and the student is now forever connected directly to the Reiki Source. Say, "you forever connected to the Reiki source."

Place your hands on the student's shoulders briefly experiencing the moment with them. Say, "We have both been blessed by this attunement".

Page 73: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 73

Part Four

Move back to the front of the student. Hold your palms toward them. Visualise a white mist surrounding you. Breath in and imagine a white Light coming down through the crown Chakra, through the tongue, down the front of the body through the Hui Yin point and up the spine, to the centre of the head. Imagine the white mist filling the head. Exhale the white mist while releasing the Hui Yin point and tongue, allowing the final energy of the attunement to bless the student.

Draw the Raku in the air in front of the student. Say, "the attunement is complete".

Closing

This concludes the Usui / Tibetan Methods. These are practices that some masters find a useful addition to the Traditional Western practices in Usui Shiki Ryoho. These are not necessary to do Reiki, but can be a useful addition to those that this resonates with. I wish you well in your exploration of Reiki.

Be Well, Be Blessed.

Antahkarana -Ancient Symbol of Healing

(Note - The Antahkarana exists in several styles of Reiki including the Usui/Tibetan, Tibetan and Raku Kai. To the best of my knowledge, it did not exist in Usui Reiki. Although it is claimed to be a "Tibetan" symbol that is most ancient (some even trace it to "Lemuria" 100, 000 years ago!) I can find no record of its existence as a symbol used for healing in Tibet or anywhere else. When showed to a Tibetan monk he said that he had never seen or heard of it before. This does not mean that it is not a symbol of antiquity, or that the procedure is ineffective. It does mean that I cannot substantiate the claims made regarding it. There has recently been a crop circle noted to be made with this pattern.)

The Antahkarana is reputed to cure everything. Most descriptions I have seen of the Antahkarana describe it as bring in the "spiritual anatomy" of all living things. It is the connection between your brain and your higher self. It is thought that if you are to ever grow spiritually, you must develop and heal this connection. The symbol itself is thought to represent that connection and is thought by its mere presence (i.e. seeing it) to facilitate that connection. Indeed, just having it in sight is supposed to have a beneficial and uplifting effect on the chakras and auras. It will also increase the efficacy of all healing techniques. It is thought to complete the Microcosmic orbit by meditating on it, which facilitates a flow of energy to all the chakras. I have heard of it being used to clear and cleanse crystals of negative energy.

The Antahkarana symbol is a cube shaped symbol. It has on its surface three "sevens". These are thought to correspond to the 7 chakras, seven colours, and seven tones on the musical scale. In the apocryphal book of Revelations there are the three sevens of the seven trumpets, the seven candlesticks and the seven seals. Its energy moves through all dimensions, leading us to our higher self. It probably corresponded also to the "seven" planets.

The Meditation practice included here is attributed to Tibetan practices. This also appears to be the same history I was told about the origins of Reiki 2,500 years ago.

It was said that the monks would use a room lit with seven candles. An earthen vessel would be in the room. Its shape was oval. It contained water. The oval shaped vessel represented the "cosmic egg" of the universe. There was a stool that the monk would sit upon, which contained the Antahkarana symbol made out of a silver metal (This might be a "master frequency

Page 74: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 74

plate" or "master frequency generator”, which Ralf Jensen developed. They are for sale at the American Reiki Masters Association(tm).) Supposedly the monks would sit on the stool and meditate on the Reiki symbols which were on a copper mirror on the other side of the room which would merge the heavenly Reiki energies and the Antahkarana would focus the earth energy blending them in the chakras.

The Antahkarana is reported to be quite a panacea. It is said to have its own consciousness, to work on the aura, the chakras, the organs, and various other aspects of the energy body. It is said to connect you to the higher self. It is like that shampoo that adjusts to what your hair needs; in that it adjusts itself to what you need at the time. I was taught that it cannot be used for harm, much in the same way Reiki cannot be used for harm. I was taught you could place it on things, under them, and all sorts of places to assist in healing. It is not a secret symbol. You can hang it on the wall in your healing room, place it image up under your healing table etc. It does not need to be seen by the healee in order for it to work. Some have laminated them to make them more durable. The small one can be laminated and placed in your shoes, or taped over a chakra or other body area to improve healing, or can be carried in the pocket, purse or wallet etc.

This healing symbol does not require an attunement. It is usually used in its printed form although some people do sign it with the hand. Just by having it in your presence, it will enhance the healing power of any healing method.

The size of the image is supposedly related to the masculine and feminine aspects of the image. It was taught me that a large single image feminine and the smaller symbol were masculine in energy.

A Meditation Using the Antahkarana Symbol

The Antahkarana is primarily used for meditation, or any exercise designed to improve health, well-being or connection to the higher power. There are a number of methods for this purpose. The simplest is to gaze on the form on a paper or to make a cube with the image on it and stare at it and meditate. Some people report that the image will fade in and out of consciousness or that they will see visions.

The following meditation appears to be like the Reiki Meditation (see above) Section of this manual, along with some basic Chi Gung Macrocosmic Orbit work. This process was thought to cleanse the system of negativity, negative energy, and to cleanse the chakras as you circulate the energy. (Author's note: Any good meditation or chi gung practice will do this.)

This meditation is purported to improve your healing skills, open the third eye, increase your clairvoyance, and any other number of wonderments. The process begins with using the Reiki Master Symbol (Author's note: has anyone but me noticed that most of these additional techniques need the Reiki Symbols/energy to power or empower them?)

First place the Antahkarana Symbol under your feet. Next do a complete Reiki Healing Attunement on yourself. Place your hands on your thighs and relax. Feel the Reiki flow. Now draw the Usui Master symbol in the air before you. (Some visualise white light coming from their hand as they draw the symbol. As you draw the symbol, say the name of the Usui Master symbol three times. Keep the image in your mind and meditate on it. Now focus your gaze on the Antahkarana Symbol. Say the name of the symbol three times, and then hold the symbol in your mind's eye and meditate on the symbol. When you feel done, focus on the symbols and move them up, into the light, or a field of intense white light.

When this is done, do the Hui Yin, then visualise the Usui Power symbol at the Hara, and then at each chakra all around the channel until you reach the hara again. This is to clear each chakra. See the light and Reiki energy at each chakra as you do this.

Page 75: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 75

Well, there you have it. Level IIIa. Use this if you like but understand that none of this is done in Japan and it is not necessary to do Reiki or do it effectively.

Complete Notes from a Reiki First Degree Class With Mrs. Takata

Note: The following notes are typed exactly as they appeared originally, except for a few spelling and grammar corrections, which were felt necessary in order to make the notes more understandable. All illustrations are scanned from the original drawings contained in the notes. For purposes of anonymity, we will call the author of the notes, R.L.

THE FOLLOWING ARE MISCELLANEOUS NOTES MADE TO RECORD VARIOUS HELPFUL REMARKS AND HINTS DURING A REIKI MEETING ON AUGUST 29, 1975

It is important to somehow motivate people to also help themselves and not rely totally on the healer. This can be done by neck exercises, and I would add, by foot and hand reflexology, by prayer, and above all a fierce desire to get well. They must learn to control their feelings and thus eliminate hate and fear and anger and greed. It is a medical fact that the above feelings release deadly poisons into the human body!

It is advisable, good and practical for two or more REIKI healers to work together, to heal each other, to strengthen their mutual faith, exchange experiences, and gain confidence. Furthermore 'Where two or three are gathered together in my name, there I am in the midst of them.' Since 'REIKI' means universal power and wisdom, the above quote is applicable. Jesus was not talking of Himself, but of Universal Love and Wisdom, with which He declared Himself to be one.

If you feel power only in one hand, you can hold hands with yourself and charge or warm up the other hand.

When encountering cold body areas, it is a sure indication such areas need healing (unless the man is an iceman!!) after a long enough period of laying on hands, one can then feel the vibrations and then proceed the normal way until the vibes cease, or until allotted time is up, and continue later with more treatments.

The patient does not necessarily feel tinkling where the hands are laying; the tinkling might be felt in an entirely different area. However the healer follows HIS or HER directions and feelings.

ALLOW LOTS OF TIME! Don’t become discouraged if results are not immediate. Relaxation or sleep are results of tensions vanished or diminished!

It is well to have an agreed starting and finishing time, especially when working with a number of patients.

Four of us were led into a room and asked to sit in straight-backed chairs in a row. I was told to take my wristwatch off because the teacher's power would damage the watch. She then explained that it was unimportant just what we call the power nor that we know why it works, but she would show us exactly how to use it.

She then asked us to fold our hands in a prayerful way: flat palm to palm, with arms lose and relaxed, holding the hands with the thumbs about level with the third eye. We were then told to close our eyes in this position and she took up a position a few feet in front and to the left of us. We could then feel a tremendous power, almost like much static, especially in the face and the hands. While we could not see, I know she did move in front of us. Two or three times she touched our hands and perhaps she did bless or purify our fingers and hand. One time she blew strongly in our faces. Then she told us we could open our eyes. The past is over and done with. Your hands are now healing hands. We then left the private room, and in the large living room

Page 76: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 76

she set up four straight-backed chairs in a row, one behind the other, and we were told to sit in the chairs and begin healing another. She told us how to put our hands on the shoulders of the person in front: Put a slight pressure on the fingertips, let the palm also rest on the shoulder, and we should in our own fingertips feel vibration, and warmth in our shoulder from the contact of the person behind us. The person in front puts his or her hands in lap. After about five minutes we changed positions. All participants underwent this experience. She then went on to say that from now on we should begin to heal ourselves. Those who are overweight would lose the avoirdupois and those who are under weight would gain up to their right weight. I believe that I experienced a healing in my right ear while sitting in the 'chair line-up.' She outlined two healing series:

1. Put both hands over eyes, with slight pressure on the eyeballs for about ten minutes, then move hands to roughly above the ears, but a little more forward, for the same 10 minutes, then move hands on back of head, just above the neck for ten minutes.

2. This series is very similar to the 'chakra-method.' You put the hands over the solar plexus, then cover the spleen, then the reproduction area, then the heart, the throat, and the forehead.

It is immaterial what you think while healing yourself or others. It does not matter how you stand or sit, just so you are comfortable. Wherever there is 'disharmony' in the other person's body you feel a vibration in the hand.

She mentioned a black lady who was a diabetic and was about to lose her eyesight, she could no longer read the newspaper, and was vastly overweight. She regained her eyesight almost immediately and within 9 months lost a lot of weight.

The instructor said she no longer uses or needs glasses, even though she wore glasses most of her life.

For a while I was sitting in front of the chair-row with the four healers in it, and I could feel the power emanating from them. I could also see the strong auras of the people, even after they left the 'healing row' their aura stayed strong. On one fellow I could see the aura not only about his head, but around his entire body.

I have a feeling that there was a connecting 'arc' of spirit between the healers in the chair row, but could not very well ask about it.

The instructor at times is somewhat disconcerting in her answers, and I have a feeling that she does not want to give more away than she has planned.

There were about twelve in our group Paul James (ed.: name changed to protect anonymity), our host, is among them.

It was announced that tomorrow (second night) all healing pertaining everything from the neck up will be covered, including mental disturbances.

She urged that we practice healing tonight yet. (What better way to make stick what she told us? She did not want us to take notes, but rather to watch her closely. 'Distant healing' will be a graduate course, for those who have mastered what she is teaching in the basic course). This promises to be an interesting four days! Bless the little woman.

Page 77: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 77

REIKI HEALING CLASS - Second Night

Tonight's subject was everything pertaining to the head, from the shoulders up. We again had our 10 to 15 minute private charging period. This time we were told to place our hands immediately in the praying position mentioned last night: hands flat together, arms free, especially at the body, at about the height of the 'third eye.' I felt my hands getting warmer from the wrist up, almost as if they were being filled with heat. When the heat reached my fingertips I had a tingling sensation.

Healing the EYES: anything to do with the eyes, including glaucoma, cataracts, sties. Place a napkin (paper) over the eyes, and put fingers over the eyes, then move to the side of the head, and then back of the head. She had success in all eye diseases; some take months, others only a few treatments. It is always advisable to treat daily, for 15 to 20 minutes.

Healing of the nose: place napkin over the nose, but do not obstruct the nostrils, place hands over nose, then over cheekbones, and finally over forehead, and top of head.

Healing of asthma: Place hands at root of throat, were it joins shoulders, then on underside of jaws and on cheeks, then nose as noted above. Also treat ovaries if female, or prostate if male, also solar plexus.

Healing of ears: Place hands over ears, put finger in ear, then put patient on side and place hand behind the ear, then turn around and do same behind other ear, also treat solar plexus and throat, for ear trouble may start with wrong nutrition. Clean out ears, after treatment. Wash eyes after treatment, but don't rub them.

Healing voice box and build up voice: Place hand (and finger) in indentation where throat joins shoulder, then treat throat all around.

Healing migraine headaches: They are frequently caused by wrong nutrition, and thus the stomach and kidneys require treatment (see tomorrow's lecture). Then treat as if for asthma and hay fever, also top of head, back and sides and throat.

It was also pointed out that the feet should be treated, naturally with the shoes off.

Loss of hair, even bald-headedness, can be treated, and it is important that proper diet be observed. Lemon juice, seeds, etc. She did not say too much about diets, but indicated the importance of it.

Healing of teeth: Place hand over upper and lower jaws, move to cover all teeth.

Healing of gum troubles: same way. Do not be concerned if teeth become loose, for this is part of the cleansing and healing process. The gums will tighten up again as they heal.

Healing of the tongue and inside mouth: same way.

Healing of goitre: (there is a visible, outer, and also and inner goitre. Trouble is caused by wrong digestion, and solar plexus and kidney should be treated first, then place hands at root of the neck, where goitre would be, then treat eyes as outlined on page #1. Goitre will cause bulging eyes. Also treat heart, because Goitre is also a circulation problem.

Healing of warts and Polyps: same way, by placing hands over warts and over nose (if polyps) in due time they will simply fall off, fall out including their roots. Polyps are usually cut off

Or burned off, but the root remains and thus they grow back in.

Today our instructor did mention that healing takes place through the power of God, and our 'REIKI-Hands' are simply channels through which the power flows.

Page 78: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 78

She squeezed out all 'blackheads' on the back of our 'model' and indicated that they are signs of a too rich diet, especially too much sugar and fat.

Today, also, after our 'private session, we were sitting in the 'four chair healing parade,' as outlined yesterday. In both, the private session and the healing chairs we alternated man and women. She said we would never lose our healing power, except if we were to try and teach REIKI to another...

She said our sensitivity would improve as we practice what we learn. When we experience the tingling sensation we encounter an area to be healed. When it stops, it is time to move our hands again. "Heal yourselves! Heal yourselves! She said several times, you come first before others.

It was brought out that there is nothing wrong with charging people for a service received, especially so since the healer invested time and money to become efficient in the work. Also the healer may have to pay for services, which he or she would normally do him- or herself if time was not taken up with healing, not to speak of cost of table, a room set aside for it. There may be other 'signs' of healing action such as diarrhoea, weakness and feeling upset.

Meditation and prayer before beginning treatments is always a good way of 'focusing' the power.

It is well to check and calm the fear the patient may have. The healer may find that he or she has ups and downs in healing power, but by keeping on doing the work; this will eventually level out and up.

Sometimes one's own family simply refuses to believe that one of their own is a gifted healer, but then it has been discovered before that 'A prophet may not be welcome in his own country.' After all doctors don't treat their families either.

Heavy perspiration can also be an indication of healing taking place.

In healing, others have also had the sensation that there is no body where the healer’s hand is resting.

A good phrase for our type of work is SPIRITUAL THERAPY. That not only covers the laying on of hands, but spiritual counselling, even prayers and is 'non-committing.'

When both hands are placed together in this fashion a greater concentration of power is achieved.

In treating the back, place hands as indicated as keep them moving, down, down, down, on both sides, then treat the spine last, top to bottom.

A sort of X-ray healing can be achieved by placing right hand in front over disharmonious spot and the left hand in back. (If you can reach it) This is where two healers can do things one can't!

Page 79: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 79

Added notes pertaining to second night (given on the third night):

Migraine headaches: Treat feet also.

Baby Drools: Treat head, teeth and also feet.

Eye disease: As noted, but also treat ovaries or prostate.

Nose Bleeding: If artery is out, pack of ice in nape of neck, pinch nose. May take 2 to 3 hours to stop.

Lesions on Tongue, Swollen tongue: Treat head and throat, but also feet.

Reiki Healing Class - Third Night.

The one, two, three, and four treatment:

It is an almost universal treatment, and since the hands cover a rather large area, one need not be concerned about exact locations. The instructor said the Solar Plexus can be compared to the main-motor of the body, it affects all other operations; therefore keep it in A-one operating order!

Bad breath is an indication of poor digestion (or bad teeth!)

(6) Is location if constipated.

One can treat people, plants, animals and fish with REIKI.

Vitalize your food (bless it, see it as God-substance, thus every meal is partaking in God-substance or is a Holy and Wholesome supper- Unity)

Pneumonia, Tuberculosis, Cancer (anywhere), Gallbladder - always apply the 1 to 4 treatments.

Treat light cases first in order to gain confidence and to build up the healing - channel's own faith in Reiki. Never give up!

R E I K I = Universal Life Energy, God-Power, Creative Intelligence.

Food: Grapefruit juice, raw beets, grated raw celery, soymilk.

(5) Indicates healing location for colons and gall bladder.

Raw red beets are excellent for cancer and blood purification.

Stay away at first from third stage Haemorrhage treatments, but go ahead with second stage, however be prepared to see it get worse at first, added flow is indication that cleaning is taking place.

Pneumonia: Place arms of patient behind and under head. Then with patient laying face up, reach with both hands under patient and treat one side of lungs, then stand on other side and treat that same way.

Caution: Do not uncover patient, only enough to lay on hands. If patient perspires, wash gently; always rub UP towards heart, face and throat rub down. Give liquid food. Treatment lasts as much as two hours.

Hiccups: Put arms behind head and treat diaphragm (3&4) until it stops.

Page 80: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 80

Perma-Sneeze: Treat same as nose bleeding.

Heart trouble is not a cause but the effect of trouble elsewhere! Treat 1 to 4, then treat the heart.

High blood Pressure: Treat 1 to 4, then head, throat and heart.

Emphysema: Treat 1 to 4

Arteriosclerosis: Treat 1 to 4 and head treatments.

Bed-wetting: Treat 1 to 4 and bladder (5), then turn over and treat kidneys. Try to train not continuous urination but a sort of stop-go-stop-go-stop-go method.

Kidneys: Self-treatment = stand up, reach back with both hands. Others: turn around face down and lay on both hands.

Stroke: lay patient flat on floor, ease all restricting clothing use 1 to 4 treatment, then head. If patient is lamed on one side: work downward to get blood down. Caution Left side head rules right side of body and reverse.

Polio: Use the 1 to 4 treatments, then turn over on face and treat like common cold.

Chickenpox: Use the 1 to 4 treatment plus head treatments (all).

Burns: Simply lay on hands.

Wrinkles: At young and healthy people it may indicate that the body needs more liquid! Age-wrinkles: Lay on hands, push wrinkles up and, or, in. They will then be anchored inside.

Arthritis, Rheumatism, Bursitis, Sciatica: Use the 1 to 4 treatments, and massage the legs downward.

Instructor: ALWAYS HAVE FAITH IN GOD!

Conclusion: The REIKI Healing Method is a way of healing whereby man offers himself to be a channel for the flow of God-Power.

Initiation: No question there is tremendous power involved. Could it be sort of an initiation of the Holy or Healing Spirit, the 'Comforter,' though our instructor?

REIKI HEALING CLASS - Last Night

I was with the first group that went in for our usual private 'power-charge.' We were told to fold our hands in prayer and raise them as in other evenings, thumb about even with the third eye. This time I felt first a warmth in my wrist, which then slowly rose right up to my fingertips, as if my hands were forming a cup filled with heat or energy. When our instructor was standing in front of me, I felt as if my whole chest was open and a stream of gentle, but warm energy was flowing into my chest from her. She also walked behind us this time and sort of tugged at our heads, pulling it back. At the end we were informed that our healing power is permanent, we would never lose it, except if we were to try to teach or give it to someone else.

As we entered the meeting room, we again had our 4-chair line-up, healing one another.

This evening dealt with the back from the neck down.

While we learned the 1 to 4 of the front, we were shown today the counterpart for the back.

Page 81: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 81

A good front and back treatment should last about 1 1/2 hours according to our instructor, and we are to stay long on the position 3 and 4 (front and back).

For sinus, ear and nose trouble also treat the lungs above at #1 position at back.

For whiplash treat throat, neck and back.

For nervous breakdown: treat especially left side pos. 1 & 2. May take three to six weeks, daily application.

Instructor suggested that when healing is being done, that daily treatments be given.

Important to treat spleen, which she calls the timer of the heart, Left side position of 2, 3 and 4.

For piles and prostate gland trouble treat #5.

For ovaries etc. treat #5

Bleeding piles are dangerous, and cause much blood loss. Always give 1 to 4 treatments front and back and 5.

Heart Trouble could be gas trouble, pushing against heart. Give 1 to 4-treatment front and back, then give rubbing 'back towards heart.'

Varicose veins - treat lower body front and back and put hands right on veins.

Watercress is good for heart trouble.

Skin impurities have their origin in digestion, treat stomach first, then face.

Eggs can cause itchy skin.

Split nails - drink water-gelatine solution.

Raw tomato juice is all right, but not the canned kind.

Our instructor emphasized again and again the 1 to 4-treatment front and back.

It is important to think and use one's head: don't just treat the effect. Distinguish between cause and effect and where possible go to the cause, and I think that is why she emphasized the 1 to 4 treatment so much: it takes most everything in.

The rest of the evening was spent listening to the history of the REIKI healing methods, and while it was interesting, it did not give us any basic additional knowledge. There will be in due time an advanced course which will deal with absent healing, and more difficult propositions, however even the advanced graduates will not be allowed to teach REIKI. After course 2 there will eventually be a third course, whose graduates will then be qualified to teach REIKI.

Mrs. Takata emphasized that a right spiritual attitude should go along with the healing (during her history telling of REIKI).

Page 82: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 82

Class Notes from a Reiki First and Second Degree Class Taught by Ethel Lombardi

Note: The following notes are typed exactly as they appeared originally (including capitalization and other grammatical errors), except for a few spelling and grammar corrections, which were felt necessary in order to make the notes more understandable. All illustrations are scanned from the original drawings contained in the notes. For purposes of anonymity, we will call the author of the notes, R.L. Ms. Lombardi is a well-known student of Mrs. Takata's and I feel that these notes serve to shed further light on Reiki as it was being taught in the mid 1970's.

Reiki I and II as Taught by Ethel Lombardi, Reiki-Master, in 1976

Reiki I

1. Healer sits at person's head. Put tissue over patient's eyes, index finger in tear duct, middle and ring finger resting gently on eye lids, little finger on cheek.

2. Hands on side of face with fingers together.

3. Hands back of head, behind ears.

4. Hands on shoulders.

ALWAYS START WITH HEAD.

Sliver or splinter in eye will work toward surface.

Anything to do with eyes: always do 1, 2, and 3 positions.

Stye: do 1, 2, 3 positions also solar plexus and kidneys. A greening hair will work out of the stye.

Burn or cut: treat immediately, and there won't be any scar.

Cross-eyes: Exercise 15-20 minutes, then treat eyes.

After working on eyes (regardless of what is wrong), if patient is female always treat ovaries.

IT IS A GOOD IDEA TO USE SOMEONE TO POLARIZE FEET. (Hold feet)

Healer is simply a channel of energy, working on others will also energize the channel = the healer.

Cataracts should be treated daily.

Diabetic: always work on eyes.

Nose and sinuses: use #4 position, also treat Bronchial tubes.

Earache: Index finger in ear, rest of hand around ear.

Ringing in ears: All positions, then both sides with hands doubled on one side at time.

Dizziness: Hands on both sides of head.

Unbalanced: Right hand in front and left hand in back. Start with root chakra, slowly moving up and work with each of the seven chakras. Then the left hand moves down each chakra in back, while the right hand stays at top of head. Deep breathing and exhalation will break blocking of energy.

Headache: Use 1, 2, 3 positions. If female patient treat ovaries for seven days straight.

Page 83: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 83

Mucus problem: Do without milk or orange juice.

Problem in mouth: Hand on lower jaw each side. If Pyorrhoea, massage gently, also treat bottom of feet.

Infection: will draw more heat.

Bursitis: Will draw most vibration.

Wrinkle in neck: Hold neck.

Dizziness: Use #2 position, which also applies to ear

Sickness and seasickness (inner ear treatment)

Goitre: Both hands on neck, overlapping. Then treat solar

Plexus, kidneys and heart.

Baby that drools abnormally: give soymilk and treat bottom of feet.

Mumps: Female - treat ovaries; male: treat prostate.

ALWAYS BLESS YOUR FOOD!

Reiki First Degree Class, Second Day

Always treat the whole body, and then go to the problem.

Solar plexus extends two inches around navel.

Shock: Treat solar plexus.

Arthritis: Do not use aluminium pans. Don't eat cheese nor drink milk. Eat lots of vegetables and fruit. Eat more white meat (chicken, turkey, and fish) Treat entire body: head, solar plexus and spine.

Cancer: Spend extra time on gall bladder.

Recommended: white grapefruit (leave the little white membrane), raw red beet (good sized), ten unroasted almonds, a handful of sunflower seeds, and one pint of water. Blend in blender. This makes a vitalizing drink for anyone.

Recommended: one head of green cabbage, one head of cauliflower, one or two large beets and an onion. With your hands put energy in food (Raw food will absorb energy). This salad is good for cirrhosis of the liver, ulcers and colitis.

Constipation: Treat all chakras for ten or 15 minutes also do all 4 basic positions.

Scar tissue: Reiki can erase it by treatment.

Breast tumours: Spend forty minutes on ovaries. If person had Hysterectomy treat anyhow, as the divine pattern, the spiritual part still exists.

Bed-wetting: Use #4 position in front and #3 in back. Have person start and stop when urinating in order to strengthen muscle.

Epilepsy: Person generally has acid stomach. No milk, Cola or sugar. Treat entire body with extra time on head.

Page 84: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 84

Hyperkinetic child: No milk, cola or sugar. Treat entire body.

Parkinson's disease: Treat entire body with much extra time on kidney area (#3 position in back) Person usually has cold thymus.

Multiple Sclerosis: Treat entire body. If patient has been crippled for a long time, he will pull a lot of energy. Good idea for healer not to eat for two to three hours before treating.

Heart Attack, Stroke: Do not give Reiki to person having heart attack or stroke; get immediate medical help. Then wait 3 weeks before treating with Reiki. Spend 40 minutes on solar plexus. Do the 1, 2, 3, 4 treatment first in front, then treat all of the heart area and #2 position in back. Give same treatment for stroke with much time on head and neck area first, then on limbs.

Varicose veins: much time on #4 and 5 positions, and then directly on veins causing trouble.

Ulcer: Eat salad finely shredded. Use #1 & 2 positions.

Leukaemia: Give much time to spleen area. Drink the 'juice; and eat the 'salad.'

Liver: Do the #1 to 4 positions in front.

Pull energy down into legs: Put right hand on hips, and with left hand pull energy down into each leg.

NOTE: Reiki is a very high vibration (love vibration). There is no need to protect self for healer.

Reiki First Degree Class, Third Night

Positions on backside.

#1 Hands on shoulders

#2 Between shoulder blades

#3 Heel of hand about at waist, covering kidneys and adrenals, located atop kidneys.

#4 Hands sideways and on tailbone, covers male prostate.

Pregnancy: #3, 4, & 5 positions.

Heart: #2 position

Left shoulder: Sleep button and calm down nervous system.

Right shoulder: Gall bladder

Whiplash, Shock: #1 to 3 positions to reach sympathetic nervous system, side of spine. Concentrate on #2 position.

Pleurisy: All of ribcage, both front and back.

Kidney and Backache: Much time on #3 position.

Prostate: #4 position.

Haemorrhoids: One inch away from rectum.

Sciatica: #5 position (also good for stroke victims and elderly people.)

Page 85: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 85

Emphysema: Entire chest area, front and back (wherever there are ribs). Treat two hours daily for 1 to 2 months.

Parkinson's Disease: Treat kidney area.

Cancer of Bone Marrow: Treat spleen.

Any spinal problem: After revitalizing with #1 to 5 positions, have two people working on each side: start at base of head and work all the way down (about one inch each side of spine).

Diabetics: Start at bottom.

Finally for older persons on bed: put Reiki in feet by putting hands around ankle and shake.

Rule of Thumb: Spend 30 minutes on head, 30 to 40 minutes on solar plexus, and 30 minutes on back.

Bronchitis: #4 position, also thymus.

Have hands opposite to each other to concentrate more energy.

Always pay attention to what your hands are telling you.

Affirmation: Father, into your hands I trust myself. Father, into your hands I give myself.

IDEALS:

a) Just for today I will not anger.

b) Just for today I will not worry.

c) I will count my blessings and be grateful.

d) I will earn my livelihood honestly.

e) I will be kind to all life forms, to all creation: it is God.

REIKI SECOND DEGREE CLASS

Day One.

A rolled-up, folded towel, as a headrest is better and more practical than a pillow. It allows the healer more freedom and room to place the hands, and is not nearly as warm to the patient.

It is very important to memorize the three symbols and the codes as pictured and outlined below. They should be ready for instant recall, so that one can imagine and draw them and recall the code names at any time.

<SYMBOLS ARE OMITTED, BUT ARE STANDARD SECOND DEGREE SYMBOLS>

1. Now by using the CHO KU REI technique, one has ten times the power to give in less than half the time. Instead, of laying on the hands by the '1-2-3-4 method' front and back, it is only necessary to give one treatment on each side.

2. In order to change wrong habits and wrong mental concepts, also addiction to smoking, alcohol and drugs, one applies first the SEI HE KI formula by 'writing' the proper symbols over the head of the patient. Then the CHO KU REI power - concentration is applied, while talking to the patient that he or she will no longer like the habit, that he won't like the taste, that the habit is not a good one for him or her, etc.

Page 86: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 86

3. For absent healing, one should either know the person by sight, or else obtain a picture. Then use the HON SHA ZE SHO NEN technique and write it over the face, saying I will now give you a treatment. This is followed by the SEI HE KI (if needed), or if only general treatment is desired the CHO KU REI is used.

4. One can also give the specialized treatment as follows: Sit upright in a chair. The knees represent the head, from the knee upward represents the body. The right side of the healer stands for the front of the patient, the left side for the back.

Reminders from the Reiki-I class:

One can never be quite sure just what is causing the particular or any other health challenge, therefore, to start with treatments, at first treat the entire body, torso, head and feet, and start with the 1-2-3-4 system: both hands parallel on the right side (1), both hands parallel on the left side (heart-side) (2), then one hand in front of the other, centred on the navel (3), finally one hand in front of the other [south of (3) taking in spleen and genitals (4)]. Watch for vibrations and stay longer where they occur. Then treat head: eyes (cover with napkin) also at side of head between eyes and ears. Treat ears by putting hands over them, by encircling them behind. Treat nose and sinus at side (cover nose). Real sinus trouble: cover upper chest and forehead to hairline. Cover jaws and throat in front, Cover mouth and teeth. Cover cavity at voice box. Free shoulders and upper chest. Treat neck and back of head and top of head. For deep hacking cough, treat sides at rib cage. For swollen tongue, drink plenty of lemon juice (lemonade) and massage ball of feet. Arthritic hands and wrists: cover with hands, also knees. They will after sufficient treatment begin to 'seep' moisture and small particles of crystallizations (cottage cheese).

A sensible diet is extremely important: fruit juices, vegetables, teas, little or no meat, no smoking, no alcohol. Do not use aluminium pots and pans, use stainless steel instead. Go easy on milk and coffee. Daily treatments are recommended until definite improvements are seen. Glaucoma, even blindness can be healed successfully. In case of running ears, place one finger in each ear. Each healer should treat self for at least an hour a day. She says holes in eardrums can't be healed, - that ain't necessarily so. There is only one Healer, and to Him, Reiki, all things are possible.

R.L's observations strictly, and no detraction of Reiki intended: Reiki (Universal or creative Energy, Godpower) is a system of steady practical application of faith, and by its nature also envisionment of healing, more than that: a dedication to Wholeness and practicing Love. It is right in line with Jesus' teaching, by its action it is practical prayer or love in action, as He Himself stated so clearly: ACCORDING TO YOUR FAITH BE IT UNTO YOU!

In case of Heart Attack: use standard procedure 1-2-3-4, then treat head and shoulders. This also applies to strokes.

For Nervous Breakdown again use 1-2-3-4, and then treat especially the left side of the back.

It cannot be emphasized too much: always start with the standard 1-2-3-4 treatment front and back, then go to the head, and don't overlook the feet! As one proceeds thus treating the entire body one is bound to find the 'trouble' spots, where more time needs to be spent. Normally treat one location for about ten minutes, and let the average treatment be about an hour, unless healer has no other engagements, or it is an emergency.

The treatment of the feet is, in my opinion, quite similar but not as thorough as the foot reflexology treatment: Massage the nerve-endings, the toes, the ball of the foot: in short Treat and bend and move the entire foot.

The finishing touch: (At the back)

Page 87: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 87

If the person is NOT a diabetic, bear down well with fingers on (1) either side of the spine (but not on the spine) from the neck downward to the end of the spine. If the patient is diabetic, then move from the bottom UPward to the neck. This done first take one side of the shoulder and move hand in a rotating movement, then take the other side the same way. (2)

Always include in the back-treatment the lower centre (for men: the genital organs and prostate, for woman their respective organs).

Also treat kidneys (3)

Where there is poor control of bladder function: give 1-2-3-4 treatment, then bladder and kidneys. When urinating, suggest it be not in one continuous flow, but in bursts, in order to exercise the bladder muscles in closing and opening, thus begin control training of the bladder-muscles

Always rejuvenate yourself first, before trying to help others!

Reiki is a spiritual - mental - physical treatment, takes care of the whole person, right in line with modern medical thinking.

Observe the five main points for correct living:

Just for Today:

1. Do not become angry!

2. Do not worry!

3. Be grateful and count your blessings!

4. Do an honest day's honest work!

5. Be kind to all and everything!

(In Unity we call that 'Living in the Infinite Presence', for wherever you are, whoever or whatever you meet, or confront, it is always God, for in Omnipresence, there is nothing else!)

The founder of REIKI was a college principal, administrator and also the college's spiritual leader, by the name of Dr. USUI (?) Confronted one day by graduating students, who challenged his belief (USUI was a Christian) and asked him 'Can you heal people, can you make the blind see, can you walk on water? After this he quit to learn more about Jesus' teaching. Studied at the University of Chicago seven years. Also studied other religions, discovered that Buddha also healed people, went back to Japan, studied ZEN Buddhism, then studied Chinese writing, in the hope of discovering the secret words of healing and knowledge. Then decided that perhaps Sanskrit, the oldest writing system, might yield the answers he was after. An old monk said they did not know but were working on it. Told USUI to go up in the mountains and fast for 21 days and meditate on the formulas he was seeking. He experienced a spiritual illumination 'he was struck by light' and saw symbols in white light ... He felt he had the answer he had been looking for and immediately hurried back to the monastery. On the way

Page 88: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 88

back (had to be back on the 21st day) he had an accident, stubbed his toe and discovered he could heal. When he got back to the monastery, the old monk was sick, but as he talked to him, again he (Dr. Usui) discovered he could heal. This story was by word of mouth related to Mrs. Takata by Dr. Hayashi, who succeeded the late Dr. USUI. This is the beginning of REIKI per se; even so Universal Energy has neither beginning nor end.

Reiki Symbols 1, 2 & 3 Master Symbol from Drawn by Mrs Takata International Centre for Reiki Training

Page 89: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 89

Japanese Reiki from Hiroshi Doi

Hatsurei-ho Source: 'Iyashi no Gendai Reikiho' by Mr. Hiroshi Doi

Here is a translation of Hatsurei-ho on Pages 207-209 from Chapter 13: "Self Empowerment Technique in 'Modern Reiki' " of Japanese Reiki Master Mr. Hiroshi Doi's book 'Iyashi no Gendai Reikiho' (Isbn. 4-9006631-34-7c0077) or "Modern Reiki Method for Healing", translated by Yukio Miura, Kyoto, Japan - Mr. Doi has given permission to print this. This technique is from a Taoist

qigong movement and is still taught in the Japanese Reiki society. Hatsurei-ho is a way to enhance your Reiki channel and help you grow spiritually.

I. Kihon Shisei (standard posture) Sit on the floor (Seiza) or chair. Relax and close your eyes. Place your focus onto your Hara-line (3-5 centimetres below navel. Put your hands on your lap with palms down.

II. Mokunen (Focusing) Say in your mind "I'll start Hatsurei-ho" to your sub-conscious.

III. Kenyoku (Dry bathing or Brushing off)

1. Place the fingers of your right hand near the top of the left shoulder, with the fingertips over the indentation just in from the edge of the shoulder (where the collar bone meets the shoulder). The hand is lying flat.

2. Draw the flat hand down across the chest in a straight line, over the "V" of the sternum (where the rib cage meets) down to the right hip.

3. Repeat this procedure on the right side, using the left hand. Draw it flattened from the shoulder, in a straight line, across the sternum, to the left hip.

4. Repeat the procedure again on the left side.

5. Place the right hand on the edge of the left shoulder, fingertips on the edge pointing outwards.

6. Draw the right hand, flattened, down the outside of the arm, all the way to the finger tips, all the while keeping the left arm straight and at your side. (note: in a Reiki Master workshop, Mr. Doi also did this with his left arm straight and out in front of him, horizontally - which certainly seemed easier)

7. Repeat this process on the right side, with the left hand on the shoulder and drawing it down the right arm to the fingertips.

8. Repeat the process on the left side again.

IV. Connect to Reiki Raise your hands high up in the air, visualize and feel the vibration/light of Reiki flowing into your hands and run thru your whole body.

V. Joshin Koku ho (Cleansing Breathing)

1. Put your hands on your lap with your palms up and breathe naturally through your nose. Focus on your hara line and relax.

Page 90: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 90

2. When you breathe in, visualize the white light of Reiki coming in thru your crown chakra, on to your hara line and expand to whole of your body, melting all your tensions.

3. When you breathe out, visualize that the light that filled up your whole body, expands to outside of your body thru your skin, onto infinity in all directions.

VI. Repeat (2),(3) for a couple of minutes or as long as you like

VII. Gassho Put your hands together holding them in front of your chest (like praying hands) a little higher than your heart.

VIII. Seishin Toitsu (Concentration) Keep the Gassho. Imagine that you are breathing thru your hands.

1. When you breathe in, visualize that the light of Reiki flows in thru your hands on to your hara line, your hara being filled with light.

2. When you breathe out, visualize that the light stored in your hara line radiate out thru your hands.

IX. Repeat (1), (2) for a couple of minutes or as long as you like

X. Mokunen Put your hands back on to your laps with your palms down. Say in your mind that "I've finished Hatsurei-ho" to your subconscious.

Open your eyes and shake your hands up/down/left/right for a few seconds.

Usui-sensei's Shuyo ho The Hatsurei ho described in Mr.Doi's book is a slightly modified version of Usui-Sensei's original. How it is done originally is also described on page 162 of his book. Hatsurei-ho is called "Shuyo ho" when it is done together in a group. It goes like this:

I. Clear one's mind by singing Gyosei (the Waka poems of the emperor)

II. Seiza - sit on the floor in zen style

III. Kenyoku - brushing off

IV. Joshin Kokyu - Soul cleansing breathing: meditation focusing on "tanden"

V. Gassho

VI. Seishin Toitsu - continue to meditate (this is when "Reiju" is give by teachers)

4. Gokai sansho - say 5 principles aloud three times

Techniques for Self Cleansing with Reiki Technique of the Reiki Shower

This technique consists of activating your energy body by absorbing Reiki energy throughout the body like a shower, and at the same time cleansing the body.

You can use this technique anywhere for cleansing yourself and for raising your consciousness. It is also useful to cleanse your aura. Just practicing this exercise also brings you into a meditative state.

Page 91: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 91

1) Stand or sit. Make yourself comfortable. Close your eyes or half open. Breathing slowly but naturally.

2) Gassho.. hands together, praying manner at the chest.

Move the hands high as possible, hands separate. Imagine that you are receiving a shower of vibrations or light, from the source of the Universe, and feel it. At the same time say loudly in your mind ; Cho-ku-Rei for 2nd level pupil, Dai-Ko-Myo for 3rd level pupil.

3) Feel the vibrations of Reiki energy.

Move the hands down to the front of the body, palm facing the body. Reiki is emanating from the hands, together with the Reiki Shower. Unnecessary energy is washed down to the earth in this way. Do this practice for a few times.

4) Gassho again to finish.

Now your whole body is activated. Yours hands are filled with the light and you are now ready to carry out healing for yourself and for others. When you do these exercises before and after the healing session you are not required to do the cleansing sequence to your aura.

Method of Breathing Light

This method is very useful for relaxation and cleansing negative emotions and mind.

1) Stand or sit. Be comfortable.

Close eyes or half open. Breath slowly but naturally. Breath in through nose and out from nose, or out from mouth if you find it more comfortable.

2) Gassho and calm mind.

3) Hands up high as possible and feel the vibrations of light in the whole of body.

4) Move hands down slowly on to you lap, palms up and loosely holding.

Bring your mind to Tan-dien (abdomen) and listen to the breathing.

5) While you breath in, imagine that Reiki White Energy is filling your head and goes down to your Tan-dien. The energy is spreading to the whole of your organs, to each cell.

Feel the healing is in progress.

6) Gassho again to finish. Shake the hands well.

You do these exercises any time, anywhere, especially when you start feeling negative, angry, sad and fear.

Technique of Breathing with Gassho

The aim of this breathing exercise is to concentrate the mind. When you master this skill, you will learn to release scattered thoughts and keep your mind still. In this way you always feel fine and keep a high will and mind. It opens your ability of sensing and knowing. Your hands will become sensitive so that you feel much more energy.

1) Stand or sit. Close eyes or half open. Breath slowly but naturally.

2) Gassho.

3) Hands up high and feel the vibrations of light in the whole of your body.

4) Move hands down slowly and stop at the chest, just above the heart and Gassho.

Page 92: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 92

5) While breathing in, imagine that Reiki is running down to Tanden from the palms, and then filling the Tanden.

6) While breathing out, energy from the Tanden is moving up to palms and releasing out sharply from there. CONTINUE EXERCISE FOR A WHILE.

7) Gassho and finish. Shake the hands.

Breathing Exercises for Chakra Activating

This exercise’s aim is to breath in Reiki energy and move it to every part of the body. In this way the body is cleansed and charged with energy. You may enter into a meditative state.

1) Stand, sit or lie down.

2) Close the eyes or half open.

3) Gassho.

4) Hands up high and feel the vibrations of light flow into the whole of the body.

5) Hands down slowly onto your lap.

6) Dan-tien breathing (abdominal breathing)… breath in and out at the abdomen. Breath in and your abdomen expands, breath out and the abdomen shrinks.

7) Do this a few times until you feel calm and relaxed.

8) While breathing in, visualise that Reiki is coming in through the top of the head, and reaching every cell in all parts of the body, and that the body is filled with light, expanding out from the body.

9) While breathing out imagine that all the tension and the negative thoughts are releasing out of the body.

10) Continue these breathing exercises for a while then visualise the Crown Chakra position, then practice the Chakra Activating Exercise below:

11) At the beginning practice the basic breathing method (Numbers 1 to 4).

i). Breath in Reiki energy through the Base Chakra, move the energy up, stop at the Heart Chakra and fill with energy. Feel the energy there, then breath out from the Heart flushing the energy out from the centre of the Heart Chakra in all directions and out from the body.

ii). Breath in the energy from everywhere into the Heart and fill the Heart with energy. Move the energy up into and out of the Crown Chakra and breath out from there.

iii). Breath in through the Crown, down to the Heart and fill with the energy. Breath out from the Heart.

iv). Breath into the Heart, down to the Base Chakra. Breath out from the Base Chakra.

Repeat a) to b) another three times.

v) Practice the same way as 5), but instead of filling the heart with energy fill the following Chakra’s, so that all Chakras are cleansed.

Tan-dien (Sacral or Sexual) - Solar Plexus - Throat - Brow.

12) Then finally exercise the basic breathing exercise, then Gassho and finish. Shake hands and clear the mind.

When you do not have time to do a complete sequence, just do to the heart.

Page 93: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 93

Technique of Self Growth with Reiki Cell Activating Method This is a healing of the whole body by applying light energy to those areas which are in a state of imbalance.

1) Stand, sit or lie down. Close the eyes or half open.

2) Gassho. Hands up high and feel the vibrations of light flow into the whole of the body.

3) Bring hands down. Breath slowly at Tan-dien. Use the mind's eye and scan the whole of the body, top to bottom. Try again. Find un-balanced areas which indicate congestion. Breath in, and while breathing out send Reiki energy to the area of congestion. While you are doing that, talk to the imbalance mentally as follows.

“Thank you for giving me awareness. Now I am learning love and harmony by the guidance of Reiki. Please help me to complete my learning through your role”.

Or "You are stiff and stressed. You are blessed with Reiki Light, so now you are all right. Your anger, sadness and fear are all gone with the light. You are a perfect being and let’s carry out what ever you are supposed to do"

Then move to the next problem area and repeat.

4) When you are accustomed to this exercise, you see Reiki White Light reaching imbalanced areas instantly.

You just need to say "You are now healed"

5) Instead of using your mind you can scan the body with your palms and do repeat the same words as above.)

6) Gassho and finish with gratitude.

Nentatsu-ho

This is to send your wish to your higher self with Reiki vibrations.

1) Stand, sit or lie down. Close the eyes or half open.

2) Gassho.

3) Hands up high and feel the vibrations of light flow into the whole of the body.

Bring hands down and place one palm to the forehead and the other one on the back of the head.

Say affirmation, "I am with the Great Universe, Great Life Source and Great Reality"

4) Move the hands on the forehead to back of the head and put on top of the other that is already there.

Send the energy there for a few minutes.

5) You can do this to other people, but make sure you understand his wish well.

6) Always choose right and positive affirmations.

Never use this technique for selfish reasons. Do not try too hard otherwise you will create more tension and imbalance. You practice this in a very relaxed and meditative state.

Page 94: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 94

Japanese Reiki Meditation

Here is a translation of a Reiki Meditation on Page 194-196 from Chapter 12: "Self-Growth with Reiki" of Japanese Reiki Master Mr. Hiroshi Doi's 1998 book 'Iyashi no Gendai Reikiho' (Isbn. 4-9006631-34-7c0077) or "Modern Reiki Method for Healing", translated by Yukio Miura, Kyoto, Japan - Mr. Doi has given permission to print this.

If you have been practising meditation, carry on the way you are used to. However you can also try the Reiki way. You will be filled with the Reiki high vibrations and surrounded by it too. This means low vibration energy cannot come close to you, therefore you are protected and this is an important factor.

In the morning and evening carry out the meditation with the right affirmation.

• Prepare your self as previous, hands in Gassho.

• Level one …………… Just Reiki shower.

• Level two …….……... Say 3 x CKR.

• Level three ……….… Say 3 x DKM.

1. Lift your hands from the sides, keeping your arms straight, slowly breathing in, till your hands are above your head

2. Keep your palm sides up, contacting the universe

3. Feel the Reiki energy (light) pouring and surrounding you.

4. Close your eyes and move your hands down slowly and Gassho in front of your face, feeling the vibration in your hands.

5. Keep the fingers straight with your tip of middle fingers at the height of your 6th chakra at the height of your forehead.

6. Breath in and out calmly and feel that you are now at one with the Universal Energy. If you feel any tensions anywhere release them and relax.

7. Feel that you are breathing in from your hands and out from your hands. Breathe naturally while imagining you are breathing through your hands.

8. Keep this breathing for a while and relax After a while, when your meditation becomes deeper, your hands may come down or may open, do not take any notice of this.

9. Slowly lift your non-dominant hand straight up in the air and put your dominant hand on your lap with palms up naturally open and slightly curled.

10. In this style, you visualise that the Universal Energy is coming in through the raised hand and release the energy through the lower hand which is your dominant hand.

11. If you have any problem areas apply your dominant hand there.

12. Put your non-dominant hand down on your lap too, just like the other hand

13. In this position you feel the Universal Love of Energy. Enjoy the sensation for a while.

14. Put one hand on your heart and give positive affirmation to your higher self.

Or

Put one hand (does not matter which) on the forehead and other one on the back of the head and give affirmation.

15. End the meditation with Gassho. This means to put your hands together holding them in front of your chest (like praying hands) a little higher that your heart.

Page 95: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 95

Non-Reiki Symbols I do not use any other symbols. As mentioned previously, many practitioners feel that the more symbols you have, the better, however the Reiki symbols are all that is needed to activate the healing energy, and I feel that adding more only confuses the issue. Symbols are just that. Symbols to bring your focus to the areas you are working with. They do not contain the ‘power’ in themselves.

For those that wish to try other symbols, there is a selection in Diane Stein’s book, Essential Reiki. Here is a copy of some symbol information, which I downloaded from the Internet, but they are not really a part of this manual. Feel free to experiment if you wish, but know that they are not necessary to practice Reiki. Remember that when you teach other symbols it is also important to let your students know that this is not Reiki, but another healing system.

In studying and working with Reiki, I have come across several additional symbols. I call these non-Reiki symbols because they are not among those that a person is attuned with when they are given the different degrees of Reiki.

While I haven't really worked with any of these personally, I can see the potential of the symbols, and the possible benefits of doing so. I am also led to comment that any study of symbols might lead to the topic of sacred geometry. And area that intrigues me, but one which I haven't had the chance to look into.

I might also comment that I know of at least four or five people who have founded new types of Reiki or additional levels of the traditional Reiki. Complete with added symbols. Some are claiming to have been given the added symbols in meditation or through similar methods. Most go on to assert that you must be initiated and attuned to these "new" energies and symbols.

Personally, I feel we are all Healers and only use the various modalities and attunements to more closely align ourselves with the Universal Energies. But I bless each of you in your walk along your own path and in your own truth. Most definitely, symbols in all forms (including mandalas) are powerful tools.

Following are a few that I have accumulated so far. I have several others which I will put on a "page 2" as soon as I can. In the meantime, Enjoy!

Johre

Speaking of symbols in general, Iris Ishikuro (who was initiated in 1973 by Hawayo Takata) said that "this science of energy, based on the language of symbols, comes to us from ancient Tibet, having been rediscovered in the Indian Sutras in the mid-nineteenth century. . . . This science is not Japanese, but is related to a number of similar kinds of universal energy sciences from India/Tibet such as the science of Mandala, and Yantras, and any science based on Mantras."

She went on to say that "symbols play a crucial role in the influencing of one's own body for one's own benefit or for the well being of another individual who is experiencing negative conditions." This relates, of course, directly to Reiki and the symbols used in Reiki II and Reiki III. At this point, however, my mind did a 'giant leap' and 'clicked' onto the idea of 'Sacred Geometry' and its relationship to our lives. I've to date not studied any of the principles of sacred geometry, but I begin to see the potential of it. . . and all symbols. Including Mandalas.

Speaking of symbols in general, Iris Ishikuro (who was initiated in 1973 by Hawayo Takata) said that "this science of energy, based on the language of symbols, comes to us from ancient Tibet, having been rediscovered in the Indian Sutras in the mid-nineteenth century. . . . This science is not Japanese, but is related to a number of similar kinds of universal energy sciences from

Page 96: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 96

India/Tibet such as the science of Mandala, and Yantras, and any science based on Mantras."

Ishikuro continues: "Realising that psychological problems have direct influence upon one's body Temple, Tibetan Holy men began correcting the state of mind, and made Sanscrit Symbols to remind the people of the divine power in their daily lives. Other uses for the Symbols include: improving health, increasing happiness, aiding in meditation, sending prayers, healing, and helping one's evolution. The Johre Symbol is a perfect example. It can be made in any size, and hung in any place. It is hung to provide peace, protection, balance, success, power, and righteousness."

Kathleen Milner in Reiki & Other Rays of Touch Healing calls this symbol Japanese calligraphy which means White Light, and dates it back about 100 years ago. She says that "Johre connects us to the Earth's guardians, and works well on releasing blockages."

Diane Stein in Essential Reiki also includes Johre in her section of Non-Reiki Symbols and again calls it White Light, but makes no further comments about it.

My own personal observation of this symbol finds it interesting to note that the first two segments of it are a 'disconnected' Power Symbol from the traditional Reiki symbols, of sorts. (Not exactly, but sort of.) The last segment, on the other hand, is a complete, clockwise Power Symbol. Interesting that the middle segments are therefore basically sandwiched between two Power Symbols similar to the way we use the Reiki symbols in healing.

The Antahkarana This is referred to in some papers I have seen as "The Master Frequency Symbol." It then goes on to call it "The Bridge Between Two Worlds" and says that it works to remiss toxicity from the system and restore cellular vibrancy on three levels of being. The inference from these papers is that some Masters may include this symbol in their attunements.

Diane Stein in Essential Reiki says of this: "Another form being used as an additional Reiki symbol is called the Antahkarana. It is a meditation and healing symbol from Tibet, mentioned by Alice Bailey and other authors as having been used in ritual for thousands of years. Placed under the massage table during healing, it focuses and amplifies Reiki or other healing energies. It is also said to connect the physical brain with the Crown chakra, and to have positive effects on

all the chakras and the aura. Meditation on the symbol automatically starts the Microcosmic Orbit, sending Ki through the central energy channels and the body. During meditation, the symbol seems to shift and change, evolving into other images. The Antahkarana can be used to release negative energy from people or objects and can be used to clear crystals."

She goes on to say that she has seen "holographic representations of the Antahkarana imbedded into square wooden plates. It seems to be used mostly in the Midwest, as the several people who have shown me the symbol are all from that part of the country. The form feels positive and sacred. It is not one of the lost Reiki symbols, but it is positive in its own use. It is said to be a symbol that cannot be used in negative ways; its energy has been proven by many healers for many years beyond its ancient history."

Page 97: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 97

Zonar, Harth, Halu & Mara With the first three of these symbols there is an interesting conflict of opinion which I've run

across. One source claims to have been given these symbols on the inner plains, and gives initiations in/with them as part of the Reiki attunements which she performs. A second source (Diane Stein in Essential Reiki) says she was shown these symbols by someone else, and that they are not Reiki symbols. She goes on to recount what she considers a 'negative' experience with one of these symbols. The fourth symbol is also given in the first source, but the origin of it is unclear.

Right here I feel to add that true Reiki symbols are 'protected' and cannot be used for negativity of any kind. So, this might tend to support the viewpoint of the second person. However, there is also the unspoken possibility that the actual symbol was not used, but a variation or addition or something. Without all the 'facts' from all persons involved, I believe a definite conclusion cannot be drawn. Having said that, I'll now share the one version of how these symbols were supposedly received, and let you make up your own mind.

Kathleen Milner in Reiki & Other Rays of Touch Healing tells this personal story. Through a friend of hers, she allegedly was able to work with "Sai Baba and other higher beings. . . on the inner planes." And over a period of time she and her friend were given each of these four symbols, and then told to initiate each other with them. She goes on to say that "there are symbols that either do not work or will not work as well unless you are initiated into them."

According to Milner, "Zonar was the first of the symbols Sai Baba gave to me. I draw the "Z" first and then come up and draw infinity three complete times. Zonar works well with past life and karmic issues. Valerie Weaver was given that infinity is a Reiki symbol which works on emotional issues. Our cells carry the memory of trauma, both the shock of our own individual experiences and those of the mass consciousness."

She goes on to suggest that even if you do not believe in reincarnation, or weren't one of the "11 million people burned as witches," we all have connections to this or "own a share of the trauma within the mass consciousness." This would hold true, of course, for all horrific episodes including the holocausts, natural and man-made disasters, and individual crimes. "What we do to another, we do to ourselves."

Milner concludes that "interestingly, Zonar is also the symbol used by a secret metaphysical society called the "Z's" at the University of Virginia. Benjamin Franklin, who wrote The Farmer's Almanac, which is based on astrology, and Thomas Jefferson were both deeply interested and involved in metaphysics. Thomas Jefferson designed the architecture for the University of Virginia.

Stein describes Zonar as "Infinity, timeless, eternity. Works well with past-life, karmic and inter-dimensional issues."

Harth is the second symbol which was supposedly given to Milner by Sai Baba. She says that "for many people, this is their favourite symbol. It stands for love, truth, beauty, harmony and balance. It is a powerful symbol for the heart as well as from the heart, from which healing and love flow. After drawing the symbol and energising it with Cho Ku Rays, close your eyes and you may see a 3-dimensional pyramid constructed to scale rotating in front of you. Envisioning ourselves going into the pyramid in meditation can be a powerful experience. . . ."

Page 98: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 98

I think it should be noted at this point, that this is the symbol which Diane Stein claims to have a bad experience with. I won't perpetuate the negativity of that by reiterating it here, but anyone interested can find the entire story in her book Essential Reiki. Again, my own personal feelings are that with care, respect, and positive intents, much can be accomplished with any symbols or healing energies. Following your own intuitions and listen to your guides and the Reiki guides in all things!

Stein does list Harth as dealing with "love, truth, beauty, harmony, balance. This is the symbol for the heart from which healing and love flow. It is a three-dimensional pyramid."

Milner goes on to tell an anecdote relating to the Harth symbol: "One of my students in New Jersey, Aaron Sapiro, met a Japanese American, who as a young boy left Japan with his family just prior to World War II. Before leaving, his family had worked with some of the men Mikao Usui had trained as teachers. The family had been given the symbol of a cross with a pyramid in the middle of it by these healing teachers."

Milner also says that many of the people whom she reinitiated with this symbol "had an instant past-life recall and experienced working with Harth in Egypt or Atlantis. Each one of these people told me the same thing; that is, that Harth had been altered slightly. When I asked, I was told by the Higher Beings that they had done this intentionally when they cleared the symbol, and the adjustment was also to insure that the energy would not be misused."

In Milner's book she says that "Halu is the third and last Reiki symbol that Sai Baba gave me. I give it out in my Reiki III classes, but have decided to include it within this text because I believe that it was never Sai Baba's intention that these symbols be sold alone for large sums of money."

Interestingly, however, she later states that "we must be initiated into this symbol by someone who has been initiated into this symbol in order for it to work." Again, you decide.

Her directions for drawing this symbol differ slightly from the order shown in the second, numbered version, which was taken from Essential Reiki. Milner says she starts "drawing Zonar, saying Zonar 3 times while drawing the infinity symbol. I lift my finger and close the "z" from top to middle. Then I lift my finger again and close the "z" from bottom to middle. I draw the tall pyramid and say Halu 3 times. I draw the circle at the top, which represents the cap stone of the pyramid, counter clockwise."

She says that this symbol is "Zonar intensified. The tall pyramid is for mental healing. The so called tall, pointed dunce caps that they used to put on mentally slow children actually worked. However, by referring to them as dunce caps, much of the beneficial energy was negated. The infinity in the middle of Halu is for emotional healing. By closing the "Z" the energy is enhanced."

Stein says of this symbol that it is "love, truth, beauty, harmony, balance and a deeper Ray of Healing. Halu is Zonar amplified in power. The tall pyramid on the top is symbolic of high mental energy."

The origin of the symbol Mara is unclear, but Milner says it is "a Reiki symbol which connects and grounds us to the Earth. Originally it was given to me in a different form and called Rama. The 5 spirals represent the 4 directions and 4 elements. The spiral in the centre of Mara represents our heart. Our hearts are the centre of the medicine wheel, the centre of the circle. The 2 "v's" coming together within the centre represent the feminine and masculine aspects of God Him/Herself. When this symbol is intoned Mara, the straight lines shift and begin looking

Page 99: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 99

like ley lines on the earth's surface; while the spirals form a vertical energy line between heaven and earth, with the central spiral intersecting the point where the 2 lines converge."

She suggests that this symbol would be very good for people who are lacking or who have no earth in their astrological charts. It would serve as a good grounding device for them. She says that "in the second Reiki initiation, this symbol opens the chakra that is in the sole of the feel, which further opens the initiate to the cobalt blue healing energy of Mother Earth and the blue-green energy of the sea. As it is of the earth, it is also a symbol for prosperity.

On a personal note, I have not been initiated with this symbol. However, after my Second Degree attunements, I suddenly noticed that the bottom of my feet were getting quite warm for no apparent reason. Now, in the past, my feet have been normally quite cool, and in the winter, I'd have problems with getting them warm after going to bed. Now, suddenly, the opposite was true. Very quickly, it dawned on me, that what I was experiencing was Reiki energy being channelled through, and out the bottoms of my feet!

I mention this to illustrate that while additional initiations may be sought, and may enhance the energy flow, they are not essential. All healing can be done in other ways and/or with the current body of Traditional Reiki Symbols and initiations. In a very real way, it does all come down to the personal level!

This batch of symbols I've taken from Diane Stein's Essential Reiki. She says that "while I do not consider these to be Reiki symbols, some of them bear discussion. Om is a Sanskrit symbol, representing the sound that created the Universe. Several other Sanskrit symbols are pictured, all with healing energy. The Palm Master symbol represents the passage of energy through the chakras and Sushumna, and may be an initiation form. Tantric Buddhist statuary shows many similar symbols carved into the palms of the hands of the Buddhas. . . ." She also goes into a further discussion of some symbols called Bijas and their uses, meanings, and areas in which you find them drawn. She sights as her source for much of this information Pierre Rambach's The Secret Message of Tantric Buddhism (Rizzoli International Publications, 1979).

It should also be noted that the three spirals of the Palm Master Symbol are identified as (top to bottom): third eye, heart, pelvis.

I offer these symbols and information here as something interesting to note. And for 'further reference' of additional symbols and their usage. Enjoy!

Karuna Reiki also uses these Symbols. Although there is no need to learn any other symbols other than the 4 Reiki Symbols as taught by Mikao Usui, it is interesting to know what they are as you may come across them when connecting with other Reiki Students from a non-traditional lineeage.

Page 100: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 100

More Symbols Kathleen Milner in her book Reiki & Other Rays of Touch Healing lists several other symbols. In each case, the symbol was apparently given to an individual person who has in turn shared it with her. She actually lists 13 such symbols; some of which are quite interesting and seem to have potential. If you are interested in this sort of thing, then I would encourage you to locate a copy of her book, and peruse it in depth.

I have chosen to include two of these symbols here as an example. They are the first two which Milner gives.

She calls this symbol Shanti and 'subtitles' it Peace. She says this "is a symbol channelled in by Pat Courtney of Milwaukee, Wisconsin. It heals the past, which allows us to live harmoniously in the present, thus releasing the future. Shanti can be used for manifesting the best possible."

As an example of one person's use of this symbol she says that "to heal and open closed chakras, Maria Rawlins of Ireland energizes and puts Johre into the closed chakras. The nest time her client comes to see her, Maria energizes and puts Shanti into the chakras."

This second symbol is called Sati and, according to Milner, "was given to me by Lawson Bracewell of Punskaiki, New Zealand. The equal arm cross represents the equal quality of Spirit (mother-father, male-female, etc.). It represents the four directions and four elements, and it is the same cross that Jesus worked with. The Romans were the ones who elongated the lower arm and turned it into the object of his crucifixion. Jesus never meant for us to venerate the implement of his torture and death; instead we are supposed to honour the elements and forces of creation. The 2 interpenetrating masculine (clock-wise) and feminine (counter-clockwise) circles represent the dynamic relationship of the 2. Out of this union the manifestation of Mother-Father-God, as well as the soul on earth, will be greater as we come out of the age of darkness and into the Age of Aquarius."

"To draw Sati, I start at the top of the equal-arm cross and draw a mirror image of the cross only. I lift my fingers and place them on the centre of the bottom line of the rectangle, and again draw mirror images. Then I simultaneously draw the 2 interpenetrating circles, right clockwise and the left counter-clockwise." This set of directions comes clearer when you realise that Milner draws all of her symbols with both hands simultaneously. So, apparently, she is drawing half of this symbol with her left hand while she draws the other half with her right hand.

Usui Reiki Hikkei and more…

I have included a copy of the Usui Reiki Handbook from Threshold Reiki, as well as some other bits and pieces, which you should find very interesting.

There are also further notes on your Reiki Master Notes Downloads provided online.

Page 101: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 101

Spirit Releasement – This is not Reiki, but may be useful with clients. The term Spirit Release is frequently used by healers and psychics to define the work they do in releasing and rescuing entities found with people, on land, in buildings and objects, which are then redirected to somewhere more appropriate to go.

Soul Retrieval signifies the bringing back of fragments of the self that have left at a time of trauma, and although still attached energetically to the person, is disconnected from the consciousness. Fragments need to be reintegrated and not removed.

Soul Rescue is a term that can mean either spirit release or soul retrieval.

This work is not normally included in Reiki training however, in order to equip you with more tools, I have decided to include this information so you will be prepared, should you ever come across anything that may fit into the following category, for with knowledge is power.

It is uncommon for Reiki practitioners to encounter these things in our day to day healings, however we sometimes encounter unexplained energies. I personally have never had any real problems with attachments to clients while doing Reiki, however while doing hypnosis on clients who have come in with specific issues have had to deal with them from time to time.

I believe the reason they are not very common in Reiki, is because real protection comes from simply maintaining a high vibration, which is naturally achieve with Reiki. As soon as we allow the lower vibrations of anger, hate, resentment etc, we find it is easier for an entity to attach. So always making sure you are grounded and connected to source before a healing will keep your energy vibration up and help to keep you protected.

Generally speaking, nothing can harm us unless we think it can, and so knowing that you are a light-worker and always protected can give protection in itself. It is also a good idea if you suspect that there is more involved than just the client, you should practice some grounding and protection, such as seeing a strong boundary around your Aura, surrounded by long stemmed roses, whose thorny stems go deep into the earth, sending your own roots into the earth from your root chakra and your feet, using your Reiki symbols for physical and psychic protection to clear a room or a person, as well as other methods which will be discussed. One should also close down one’s chakras and zip up their aura after a healing if you feel in any way vulnerable.

Probably the most important thing for me to say is that you should never get in over your depth. If you have been trained in Spirit Releasement, then you may deal with the attachments that you feel confident to deal with. Otherwise do not disturb what you do not understand, and just do the Reiki treatment you have been asked to do, knowing that that in itself will go a long way towards helping the client to heal. If you feel that there is definitely an attachment but are unsure as to what to do, refer the client on to someone else who is more qualified to deal with the situation.

Another thing that is useful to know is that Universals Law states that if you ask an entity or attachment to leave and go towards the light/or to the most appropriate place for them 3 times, they must go. With some entities it may be necessary to ask Archangel Michael to come and assist, but we’ll go into that later.

Below is a broad outline of types of attachment to help you understand this little known phenomenon.

Although science has not yet proven the presence of spirit attachment, there is much evidence to suggest that these can and do exist and can have a strong influence on our lives.

In my experience there are many possible outcomes to spirit releasement for the soul or entity we are dealing with at the time. We should always treat every entity or soul we meet with

Page 102: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 102

respect and compassion and ask each individual if there is unfinished business on this earth plane. We always endeavour to assist the individual with resolution wherever possible. No being is ever treated discourteously.

Psychic Attack involves an external energy which negatively impacts on our sense of wellbeing. It can therefore come from environmental factors as well as living people.

Spirit Attachment is the presence of a living or deceased entity in the aura or energy field of a person and sometimes an object.

Possession is where the entity has entered the person’s body and is lodged inside.

Haunting is the term most often applies to buildings, sites or objects and involves for example, ghosts, poltergeists and imprints.

Types of Attachments

The things that can affect us can be various in nature and some of these types of attachments are set out below.

Once medical causes for some of these symptoms have been discarded, other possibilities are to be considered including energies coming from our own subconscious and unconscious minds that can be perceived as having a life of their own. For example - from complexes (a complex arises whenever there is a defeat – Carl G Jung), to our past lives, to earthbound entities, to ‘spiritual beings’. This latter realm can encompass alien forms of consciousness some of which are termed ‘dark energies’ in some quarters.

1. Ignorant or earth bound spirits, ghosts, lost souls 2. Thought forms 3. Negative energy and psychic attack 4. Curses, cords, vows and contracts 5. Past life attachments and ancestral patterns 6. Inner child fragments and soul retrieval 7. Satanic influences, dark force entities, demons and the collective unconscious 8. Programmes, mind control programmes and Implants 9. Entities and Clusters 10. ET's & More Implants 11. Elementals 12. Earth Energies

1. Ignorant Spirits, Earth Bound Spirits, Ghosts, Lost Souls

DEFINITION OF A GHOST – a soul caught in an incident, most likely their own traumatic death – waiting for someone to come along and help them.

These spirits were once a living person who dies but did not have an assention. The problem is that they drain the host and the client will have difficulty in separating their needs, wants and desires from those of the entity’s. The purpose of attaching to the client is so that they can fulfil the needs and appetites of the Ignorant Spirit.

At the incident of their death not all of the spirits stay with their body, perhaps if they did there would be a different outcome to becoming stuck on the earth plane. They report being shocked out, too horrified at the sight of their injured body to bear to look, rushing off to get help not realising that nobody can hear them – simply not realising they have died.

Page 103: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 103

They hover about and move around in space often not realising that they are ‘dead’ and that they cannot be heard by the living. They can be attracted by human, animal or earth energy fields thereby becoming ‘attachments’.

A few stuck souls are stuck because of souls that attached to them and they may need to be counselled in just the same way as the first soul. It is my experience that releasing one soul doesn’t automatically reach or release the other, so it is necessary to ask the other soul/souls to leaves as well.

Some souls are stuck because they have missed a window and are waiting for another one to open to show them the way to the light.

Earth bound spirits that are trapped often feel confused, lost and afraid. They are sometimes looking for help and are sometimes drawn to living people. If they died in physical or emotional pain, these pains can appear within the person they join and with whom they resonate, feel comfortable with or whom they think might be able to help them. They will reside in a person’s or animal’s energy field, in a house or place that they resonate with in some way. They most likely will cause unintentional problems for those they are linked with or attached to. When told that they are possibly hurting the person, the response is often distress because they didn’t understand they are causing problems. Quite often, they don’t actually realize that they are dead as the decision to ‘run’ is a split second one – as in the near death experience.

It can take a good deal of time and sensitivity to help these souls. We ask for help from their ancestors and loved ones so that there is somebody familiar to help them and that can be so comforting for the soul. Even if the death has taken place many years ago, the ancestor seems able to manifest in the same time zone, which is further comforting.

2. Thought Forms

“A thought form is a psychic entity that separates from its originator and develops a life of its own. The lowest form is a complex, which is something that modifies your behaviour without you being aware of it but it is there all the time in the background. In its strongest form, a thought form could manifest as a poltergeist”. Ric Cuminetti

“A complex arises when there has been a defeat” C. Jung

E.g. – You have a thought form as a child following a trauma. Mum who is already upset, shouts at you and really loses her temper, perhaps for the first time, because you drew all over the walls in indelible felt pen and screams "you stupid child – you ruin everything – look what you’ve done." The devastated child thinks – 'I am stupid – I ruin everything – I am a destroyer'.

When any new task is attempted, the thought form kicks in and the child stops creating, feels miserable and becomes destructive.

The child becomes an adult and has a history of failure and finds learning difficult. He/she does not progress in life. The thought form is now bigger and has a life of its own. The person is destructive but doesn’t understand why. When we locate that same thought form we are able to explain that it is somewhat outdated and offer it the chance to transform, in co-operation with the person’s own Higher Mind, into something helpful and positive.

Another example could be a desire to stay protected and instead of being just a simple protective shield, the Thought Form is too strong, and blocks the person from receiving anything in terms of energy and is so tight and restrictive that it actually hurts. The person is exhausted, depleted and feels cut off. Their own desire for protection has caused them to be in this condition. A simple remote scan will rectify this situation.

Page 104: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 104

We talk with these thought forms also and let them know that there are not being helpful to the person. There is always the possibility of transformation and the client often feels the result of working with a Thought Form instantaneously and often tells us the exact time we were working with them.

There have also been reported cases of the Hawaiian Kahunas deliberately creating thought forms and sending them out to do their bidding. This can be another explanation to the Aboriginal Medicine Man pointing the bone. They also talk of the Kaduchi/Guduchi? Man (unknown and unmentioned to most people) who is a dark shadow man sent out to harm others.

3. Negative Energy and Psychic Attack

Much as a thought form can become matter, negative energy can be harnessed, both accidentally and deliberately and can manifest to affect the originator or be used to affect others.

Negative energy is left over in what some term as the lower astral planes of the earth and is also sometimes called the collective unconscious. As humans we have a chequered history of oppression, dictatorships, devil worship, war, pestilence and the souls who died, their perpetrators, the victims, the angry and bereaved at times don’t move on. It is the energy of these souls and their associated thought forms that can be harnessed or drawn in to us. Sometimes these souls are aligned with dark forces and off world entities and used for purposes of harm and destruction.

Of course, through the Law of Attraction we also generate our own misery and we all know what it is like to walk into the energy field of a depressed or angry person. Imagine if those feelings can be ‘sent’ to another with just a thought. Worse still with ritual and intent.

These projections can sometimes be felt as a physical blow and can cause all sorts of misery, depression and illness.

We work with these energies to reverse their effect and wherever possible to help them find peace and resolution. We often find ourselves connecting with large numbers of souls in this work and it is quite remarkable how many of our clients facilitate the healing of many.

Psychic Attack

Psychic attack can be either a deliberate or unintentional ‘attack’ on someone else much as described above. The source is usually a person that is very negative in their attitude and harbours destructive and unpleasant feelings, thoughts and intentions. The energy transmitted can cause a range of problems, such as feeling unwell, problems in relationships and failure to find success and happiness – the list is endless.

In certain societies, nations and cultures it is common practice to employ people who specialise in sending harmful forces to others. People who utilise the lower energy bands to harm others do exist and employ energy workers to attack others who in turn employ energy workers to attack back. Again, we work with these aspects but not to revenge but hopefully to facilitate healing where possible so that the dispute ends. We are sensitive to the laws of freewill and do not make any attempt to interfere except where there is a request from Higher Mind. We leave healing the world to others!

When helping clients under psychic attack or curses, always send the energy to the light, not back to where it has come from, as this can just start a war between opposing forces and then drags your vibration down.

Page 105: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 105

4. Curses, Cords, Vows and Contracts

Curses A curse is something sent or decreed by another, which is often kept in operation by a third party. For example – a ship lands on an unspoilt island that has never seen White Man. The crew who fraternise with the locals bring venereal disease. As the ship sails away, the local wise man/witch doctor sends a curse that the fruit of the loins of the sailors will never thrive. So, you have a family who have a lot of early deaths, history of miscarriages who may feel ‘doomed’ or ‘cursed’. This is but one example and perhaps a little extreme, but it does give the reader an idea.

One then becomes a mediator between the parties to explain the amount of lives and time this old hurt has taken up and to encourage letting go. If all parties ‘see’ that nobody really died anyway, it is hard to keep up the feud or curse.

A simpler curse can be an argument at home and the powerful, angry, spiteful thought sent out to the offending family member of ‘I’ll hate you for ever’. Here begins a long-standing family feud!

Cords Psychics are sometimes able to psychically ‘see’ a cord from an image during scanning. To follow the cord is to find the person, often a loved one or close friend passed, they are holding on to – sometimes we hold that person to the earth plane not only preventing ourselves from ‘letting go’ but also preventing them from moving on too. To gently untangle the cord with spirit release and perhaps some suggested ways of letting go is to free both parties. Cords can also relate to past lives, old events, sicknesses and alike.

Once a cord is removed, always fill in the spot where it has been removed from with light, otherwise this leaves a weakness in the energy field for another cord or attachment to connect to.

Vows A vow made to a loved one ‘I will never leave you’ – a plea ‘don’t ever go’ can become matter as a thought form and precipitate people living lifetime after lifetime caught up together. This can be mother and daughter, father and son, husband and wife, killer and victim. The vow can be ‘I’ll get you back’ – 'you’ll pay for this' etc. Finding and clearing these vows create great freedom for all parties.

These sorts of scenarios are often hidden initially by other attachments and take more than a couple of sessions to uncover but they do get uncovered and there is resolution and the letting go of these unhealthy and destructive traps we get caught in.

Contracts Less prevalent than the foregoing but just as powerful are contracts where an agreement has been made, perhaps by people who died together in say the war or an accident, to ‘stay together’ and they will become stuck in the earth plane. Other examples are agreements to get somebody back, to execute a business deal of some kind or simply to continue an old feud. There will sometimes be a bit of paper involved that needs to be burnt or destroyed to free the people concerned.

5. Past Life Attachments and Ancestral Patterns

Perhaps it is wrong to group these two together, but they do all involve the past and where there is unfinished business for the soul, there will be an earthbound spirit too.

Cords, bonds, contracts or agreements as discussed above, can also link you to past experiences, other people or places. They can cause, as we have said, ill health, pain,

Page 106: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 106

exhaustion or a feeling that you have blocks to success and happiness in your life. There can be instances of dark force with past lives as well.

Some of the above apply to other life times (note: if you are uncomfortable with the concepts of other lives, just think of these being stories told by the unconscious mind).

We all know people who seem to be living out of life script of ‘life’s a struggle, I never can win, all men hurt me, love hurts, I’m always being walked over. Another way of looking at these would be to identify with the archetypes we all play out at times. Through the medium of spirit release, we can have a strong character from a past life who has unfinished business on the earth plane who needs help to move on. The release of this spirit can make a huge difference to one’s happiness.

Remote spirit release is a good way of identifying the source of one’s discomfort. It may be a good idea to seek further help if this is recommended during the scan.

Ancestral patterns too can run through and destroy families. Finding the ancestor who has been unable to let go can also be a great benefit to those in this generation now.

6. Inner Child Fragments and Soul Retrieval

When we encounter a trauma or accident a part of our energy body may become separated from the whole and frozen in that particular time, emotion or behavioural response. When these fragments are retrieved and reunited with the whole, the healing of issues can often then begin to take place.

We do come across these fragmented parts quite frequently in remote spirit release. It can be incredibly helpful to have the story brought to the forefront through remote work and many clients are able to continue healing these parts without therapeutic assistance. Others may benefit from the services of a trained counsellor, preferably locally to the client. I am also available via telephone or Skype: Carol-Macrae

7. Dark Force Entities (DFE’s) and the collective unconscious

The term Dark Force Entity is an attempt to clinicalize more familiar names such as demons and devils. These entities were never human. They never had a physical body. These entities were once angels who have “fallen”. Their purpose is quite different from the ignorant spirit. The DFE’s intent is to harm their host, and to interfere with any good the host may want to do in this life. They will try to interfere with the person’s attempts to connect with God, the Light, love and family. Its’ main tool is to cause fear, so we must be very calm when talking with these entities, and show that we are connected to the light. In the past these entities were removed by exorcism. This of course was through the Church, whose clergy were attempting to “Do Battle” with the entity, which of course is like fighting fire with fire, rather than sending it love and light, which is like fighting fire with water.

Again I cannot stress too much that you should not attempt to remove these entities if you are not confident to do so, as there have been reported cases of the entity simply moving from the host to the Light-worker.

Investigation and dialogue usually bring us to the core of the alleged dark force entity where we find a misguided soul who took a path from the light to dark somewhere along the path of life. There may be more than one or they may have joined other aspects. Given time, consideration, respect and a listening ear – these souls can quite quickly decide that their path hasn’t worked for them and that they can make a more positive choice. Some need to be forgiven, to forgive themselves and/or meet their ancestors; others take longer to change their minds.

Page 107: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 107

Some of these dark or demonic forces join with the collective unconscious to gain greater power and greater numbers.

This may strike you as an over simplified description and indeed, some of the cases that come our way are complicated with many layers of disguise and subterfuge built up over lifetimes. However, we do find that ultimately there is goodness and love in every being and we hold the belief that all beings come from the source and that this source is the power of love, light and healing. Whether you call this source God, Buddha, the Universe, Quan Yin, Higher Self, or a Higher Power it does not matter as we work to no particular religious conviction.

During my work, it is wonderful to experience the joy that souls relate when they are re-connected with the source and find their true nature again.

Dark force entities and alike are often the victims of deceit themselves – they have been told that if they torture, terrorise and make mischief for somebody they will become powerful. They are often told that if they go back to the Light or talk with spirit release workers then a worse fate awaits them. I have sometimes been involved in long dialogues whilst getting their trust that the light isn’t a bad place but one of peace, love, and healing and spiritual evolution.

It is also effective to call upon Archangels and Ascended Masters to participate in the releasement, and to also call upon one who knew the DFE before the fall, to help them to go towards the light. I will often call upon Archangel Michael to wrap them in a cloak of light as I do the work is a session with Hypnosis clients, and reminding the entity that they were once angels or beings of light before the fall, and that if they look inside to the deepest, oldest part of who they are they will see the light. Once they see the light, remember that what we focus on grows, so they them are drawn to it more.

When removing these entities, it is important not to refer to them as “Dark Force Entities”, as this will focus them on the darkness, rather I call them “Lost One”, and once they have seen the light within them I call them the “New Found One” before releasing them to the Light.

8. Programmes, Mind Control Programmes and Implants

An example of a programme we may encounter at times could be from a past life when a person has been a perpetrator at say age 40 and become, for example, a killer. The guilt at the end of the person’s life has been so great that they instigated a thought form that ‘if I ever get powerful again, I will – destroy myself, lose all my money etc’ and it will be set to go off age 40. It may be programmed to go off cyclically at other times of impending power too.

Some people are actually programmed by others – let’s call them the implanters -and these programmes are difficult and complicated to unravel. Often one to one therapy is more effective in these cases. The benefit of remote release is that this type of programme can be identified and the client advised as to the next step. This is a highly specialized field.

9. Entities and Clusters

We do encounter entities and clusters of entities, which are generally more powerful than the ones previously discussed. They often have thought forms with them, dark force and seem to have become larger over time. Some travel the universe looking for people who are vulnerable and can control and join several people at once. They often report some kind of destructive purpose and will report to other entities and are also controlled by those other entities so that a string is present.

With such attachments it is important to follow all the chains, which may be 6 or 7 layers deep, and to undo all the commands. These can and often do link to the programmes mentioned earlier. Again, if these can be identified by the medium of remote spirit release, a better way

Page 108: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 108

forward is often to work in one to one therapy with a therapist to achieve permanent clearing. This is a highly specialized field as are the programmes and implants.

10. ET’s and Implants

The idea that we are not alone in the universe is not a new one and in an analysis of types of attachment, some research suggests that around 15% of attachments were not from our world.

I speak not only from my own experiences as a Reiki Master, Hypnotherapist and Spirit Release Therapists but from information reported elsewhere and from speaking with other colleagues. Some of what you read may seem bizarre and indeed it is. I can only say that other therapists encounter exactly the same entities when we compare notes on the types of entities and ETs, and I have seen it reported in several books.

There seem to be many other dimensions, worlds and many types of ET. Mostly they attach to us by accident and it is not uncommon to ask an ET how it can to be with someone and to receive a reply of ‘well I crashed my spacecraft’. We offer assistance and reconnection to their home planet.

Some ETs come to help us, some want to know us, some want to feed on us and/or our energy, some are experimenters, some envy our human form and ability to feel, some are watching us and reporting back, some want to learn, some got lost and are stuck and some want to harm. I am sorry to say that some are reported to use us for breeding purposes (see Close Encounters VI – William Baldwin)

Some ETs actually feed upon our energy and when told that they are breaking the universal laws of freewill some will immediately apologise and others express a ‘so-what’ attitude – I’m hungry. In the latter cases we obtain assistance from their dimension and their removal is expedited by their own beings.

Other ETs align with dark force or other and are actively engaged in harming the human race and trying to merge with our DNA. These cases need to be traced back to their source and we have discovered that some of them have been captured by other beings/entities are have been programmed against their freewill to harm humans. They are glad to be released but then we have to deal with their controllers to ensure permanent clearance. They often use cyclic implants set to go off at certain ages, in certain situations and, worryingly, into the future. This latter work is sometimes better done in session rather than remotely also.

Some ET attachments can take a long time to recover from but happily these are not as prevalent as the simpler types.

11. Elementals

An elemental is a mythological being first appearing in the alchemical works of Paracelsus. Traditionally, there are four types:

• gnomes- earth elementals

• undines - water elementals

• sylphs - air elementals

• salamanders - fire elementals

Elementals live in a parallel world but we are unable to ‘see’ them, possibly because they are vibrating at such a different rate to us.

The elementals we tend to encounter in spirit release are ones upset by the client because work has been done to ‘their’ garden and they have been uprooted and had their homes destroyed.

Page 109: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 109

These same elementals become angry and will attach to us to get revenge and become stuck in our dense energy.

Other elementals attach to us because they like us want to know us better and wonder what we are about. Our energetic density ensures that they stick and their distress can be discomforting for us.

We are asked at times to work for people who want our help in learning about the elementals in their gardens, farms, and homes so that to co-operate with these elementals in our gardens is to live in harmony. There is one corner of our garden that we simply are not permitted to mow the lawn in to cite such a case.

With the amount of building work, road works and decimation of woodlands and countryside, the elemental population are suffering acutely and we do recommend that if you are doing work in your own house and garden, that you consider the other world folk living there and perhaps consult workers like us to mediate! It may be that a small water feature is the answer to harmonious living following disturbance but it is worth finding out.

I do not claim to be experts in this field and only a small proportion of attachments seem to be from this dimension. It is enriching to be in touch with this magical and enchanting realm. When releasing them it is suggested that rather than sending them to the light, one should send them to the most appropriate place for their highest good.

12. Earth Energies

In much the same way as elementals are affected by our activities and can become angry if disrupted, earth energies react in the same way. I have read about others who have done work in homes above or crossing ley lines, where there is a tear in the fabric of the earth and where earth creatures are disturbed. This work has been 100% successful and places where people have been ill, feeling uncomfortable and experience dis-ease – areas become settled and happy again.

Signs and Symptoms of Attachments

• Feeling tired and depleted of energy • Suffering mood swings and/or impulsive behaviour • Unexplained bursts of anger, sadness or emotion • Hearing inner voices • A feeling that ‘this isn’t me’ • Do you ever wonder – did I/they say & do that? • Problems with addictions • Poor memory, concentration or confusion • Has there been a sudden onset of anxiety or depression? • Has there been a sudden onset of physical problems or pain with no obvious cause? • Unexplained fears, phobias or panic attacks • Worrying or disturbing nightmares • Are you reacting to this list with emotions that surprise you? • Do you have feelings of being watched or experience unexplained sensations – a smell perhaps, a distortion of space? • Do you have feelings of uneasiness, cold areas in your home or a sense of another presence when nobody else is around? • Is there a feeling of depression around you that just doesn't make sense?

You may notice in other people a sense that someone you know just hasn't been the same since that accident, since losing a loved one, since moving house – anything involving change whether enforced or chosen. These are all factors to consider.

Page 110: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 110

Note: Many of these symptoms can also indicate medical problems so always consult your doctor.

Home and Property Clearance

Earthbound spirits often get attached to property and/or land, e.g.

• This may be a past occupant of a house.

• This may be the site of an old battleground where soldiers have died and are unaware that they have passed on and that they are no longer on duty. Traumatic death often causes the spirit to leave the body in shock.

• This may be any place where there was loss of life.

• This may be an accident black spot.

• Perhaps it is a place where houses existed long ago that have become derelict and built over. The spirits connected to the old property may still be around.

• This may be a seaside spot where sailors and fishermen have drowned. This may be an old burial ground or cemetery.

• This may be the site of a murder.

• This may be the site of Satanic Ritual Abuse, Devil Worship.

• This may be an old spiritual site which attracts spirits.

In our work as lightworkers we also come across patches of ground where disturbances are occurring. These can manifest as visual disturbances, uncomfortable feelings and it has been known that energy can actually cause accidents and physically affect the people in the area.

On these patches there can be incidents of ill health, unusual behaviour, animals acting strangely and other phenomena.

There are areas in which the occupants experience electromagnetic energies associated with electric pylons and mobile phone masts. I have had some success in this field but this is not my area of expertise and you may like to consult a specialist.

Using the Reiki Symbols to clears an area is very effective- draw Symbol 1 or the Master Symbol in each corner of the room and pull it in to the centre, then draw the symbol over the centre. I have also used these symbols and drawn one or the other on crystals or stones and placed them in each corner of my room, my bed or the outside perimeter of my home or block of land.

One should also say “As a representative of the human dimension, I command you to leave this place and move towards the Light, or to wherever is the correct and proper place for your Highest Good and the Highest Good of all concerned”. I have used this on several occasions and it always works. I have also used smudging in conjunction, and this is also very effective.

Removal of Entities, Attachments and Cords, etc.

When these entities are removed they are always sent towards the Light or to the place that is right for their highest good, and the highest good of all concerned.

Self-esteem work to permanently change a client’s vibration is also recommended.

Techniques

Prayers & Blessings- usually used in religious deliverance and exorcisms, calling on the power of the Divine and commanding the entity to leave.

Sprays, Oils & Essences- There are several that may be sprayed to help clear the aura and bring strength, balance and stability. Essences include Crystal Clear and Astral Clear as well as Australian Bush Flower Space Clearing or Alaskan Purification Essence. Some oils

Page 111: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 111

suggestions are tea tree, pine benozoin, eucalyptus, olbas, juniper berry, clary sage which may be burned in an oil burner.

Crystals- It is said that the white crystal selanite removes entities from the aura. Amber, bloodstone, black obsidian, black tourmaline, kunzite, rose quartz, smoky quartz, amethyst & clear quarts are also good for clearing negative energies. These are often used on a wand or a single or double terminator crystal, which is a many sided quartz crystal with a point at one or both ends to concentrate and direct the energy to release trapped spirits.

Crystals shold be regularly cleaned and this may be carried out using visualisation, intention, smudging, candle flame, Reiki, dowsing or placing them on a bed of quartz.

Sounds- loud sudden noise can dislodge an entity by sending a vibration it does not like, however the spirit still needs to be guided to the light. Some examples of this may be playing loud music, ‘om’-ing a room, beating a drum or tin, singing or toning, crystal or Tibetan bowls or clapping your hands.

Complementary Techniques- Some bodyworkers such as osteopaths, cranial sacral therapists, Reiki and Massage therapists use techniques for safe release, making sure not to take on the entity themselves.

Acupuncture- In Five Element Accupuncture the aim is to balance the mind, body & spirit and release negative blocks which may be considered as negative energy and in some cases possession.

Hypnotherapy- While the client is in hypnosis the therapist is able to talk to the entity. If the client is unable or unwilling to answer, idiomatic responses or finger signals. Some therapists also use a second person as a scanner. This work is what I usually employ to release entities and attachments to the light.

Dowsing- A pendulum may be used to clear some but not all entities from a room. If it starts behaving oddly, it is probably being influenced, so do not continue. After obtaining a yes, no and neutral position ask “is there a negative energy in this room?” If ‘Yes”, direct it to clear the negative energy from the room, turning it into positive energy, and show me when it is done. Once completed, the pendulum will change direction. This can also be done to clear someone’s energy field or balance chakras.

Physical Contact- Gently pull from the client’s body and send to the light, being mindful not to allow it to attach to you. Usually it can be handed up to a Being of Light.

Visualisation- Scan the body and notice any dark or coloured patches and ask the client “what does that colour mean to you?” Ask them if they feel they are holding on to anything that may be blocking them, and once they are ready to release the negativity, ask the client to also visualise the spirit or entity leaving and going to the light.

Light Beings- Before carrying out any of this work ask God to send you the appropriate Beings of Light to be with you, work with, through and around you, and to protect you, your client and your space as you work. They assist in keeping you grounded and safe. You can also call upon particular Angels, Guides and Ascended Masters to assist in the removal of the entity. They may also be called upon to escort the entity on it’s journey.

When to Call in a Specialist

Regarding the more serious variety of entities, whether you are dealing with what you perceive as demonic possession or karmic-miasmic expressions, as mentioned, I recommend turning to a specialist in these matters, whether this be through psychology (therapy), soul clearance ("exorcism"), a spiritual master (or guru), or higher guidance (channelling). In recommending appropriate sources who specialize in the help that needs to be done with this particular

Page 112: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 112

clearance, point the way, and do the usual work that you understand is your higher purpose: to lead people to the light. This work can include referring people to others who specialize in areas that you sense that the referral needs to be made. Understanding and being clear about where your work needs to be passed on to someone of a higher level of mastery is a very important distinction to make.

After the entities are successfully released, both you and the person you're working with will feel the difference in their vibrational quality. Whenever everything is fine, you should experience an energy envelope of peace and love. If the person is still agitated there may be a sort of residue, even if the entities are now gone. It is like almost being "over" a cold. The virus has run its course, you don't have a fever, and you're not contagious, but you still have some sniffles.

You may treat the residue with Reiki, but I would suggest that when you're dealing with anyone who has negative entities it is always best to do Distant Reiki with them. Hands-on Reiki is a bit more risky because when that person is in your physical proximity (remember, just as people come into your aura), their energies come into your aura. The energy of the person who has attached entities can come into your energy field, unless you have put up protection and are able to keep your vibration high.

Setting Up Continual Assistance

Now, if you are secure in your light body these energies effectively bounce off of you. They can neither come and "cord" to you, nor siphon off your energy, nor hang on to you in any way. But don't take it for granted that your angels and guides are always going to be there to protect you. They always need permission; those working in the light always need permission and they will wait for you to ask. So, you might say: "Whenever I need information, give me that little rush that you give me so that I know it is your energy. Whenever I need protection, whenever I'm missing something that I need to see, whenever you're saying "Yes" or you're affirming something, give me that rush of energy (tingling or whatever) that I know is you so that I will pay attention."

And do this clearly, with intent, meaning “always protect me, always give me information, always make me see something I need to see, always guide me” etc. That’s the sort of thing that you need to do, because otherwise all you're doing is asking, in the moment, for right now, for one time. Share this with other people. It seems so obvious, and yet few seem to realize this.

Those of you doing healing work these days may find yourselves in situations in which you are taken by surprise. All of a sudden you know there's something "dark" there. And you know that soul clearance is not a line of work that you specialize in. Appreciate at these times the appropriateness of referring severe cases to those who are adept at taking care of these things.

Some of you have been taught that if you say, "In the name of Christ," then the entity has to leave. But this does not always work. This varies according to the strength of people's true belief in Christ. We know that many have a problem with using the name of Jesus, and this is a residue, of the patriarchy, and they ask, "Do I really buy into this kind of thing?" Our first comment would be to say: "I [your own name], in my name, command you to go to the light." You are the sovereign of your own self.

When I was doing my Reiki Master’s Training in Broken Hill, the shearer’s quarters in which I was staying were haunted. The next day the 4 Master’s plus the 2 teachers stood around the building and we all listed our hands up as in Reiki Shower and said “as a representative of the human dimension, I command you to leave this place and go towards the light!” We said it 3 times before it actually left, but we all felt it leave simultaneously.

It is suggested that focusing on them makes them stronger. Focusing on them can indeed bring them to you if you didn't already have them. And so the message is basically that consciousness is all, and that what you focus on is what your state of being is, ie, focus on

Page 113: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 113

Love not fear, and don’t particularly go looking for them, or you may find what you are looking for!

So one of the other methods of expelling entities is to shift your focus to something that will instantly raise your vibration. If anyone is wondering if they "have entities" they may start calling to them. They're saying: "Come on down." As soon as they focus on the dark entities they are effectively becoming resonant to them. This is how we call in other beings of Light. As guides of the light, we look for those whose resonance matches ours. It's a simple law of all entities, and the so-called dark entities do the same thing.

Remember that if you want to call on your Angels and Guides, first ground yourself, then call on God to send you the most appropriate Angel or Guide to help you at the time. In this way you will not receive a “trickster” or “imposter”, but will get what you need.

People with very low self-esteem, with self-loathing, may attract the entities just by not thinking enough of themselves. And remember that many people are not conscious that they have self-loathing. Understand why this makes them resonant to certain dark energies. It is not as though the entities have self- loathing. They just have a lack of love for others, of desire to serve. We need to point out that you can, through self-love alone, achieve a higher-dimensional existence, and yet we would not associate that with working in the light. We would associate that with achieving the power that is derived from total self-love.

And this is what many "spiritual" human beings these days fear (and what keeps them in a state of disempowerment)--they fear they will abuse their power. But you cannot come into your full power until you have that level of self-love. Again, I suggest that working in the light means that you balance the self-love with service to others in the light. And this is the other side of the coin.

You Create Your Reality

You see? Those who focus on such entities will indeed invite them in. The person will be sure that the entities made their appearance and then s/he started focusing on them. This is the great illusion of three-dimensional reality: that something happens outside you, and then you form a belief out of that experience. The truth is that you believe something first; then out of that belief you create events that you "seem" to experience. You create everything in your world, and although there are now a multitude of books that affirm this fact, it is still one of the hardest things for people to believe. I strongly suggest that understanding that you create your own reality is critical to all acts of personal empowerment, most especially manifesting abundance in all areas of your life.

Energy Management

Opening and Closing- The basic concept is that before working psychically, spiritually or healing, we “open up” the chakras and expand the aura. Once we have finished we “close down”. We don’t actually want to close them down as this would cause a block in the flow of our energy. Instead, we want to think of “closing down” our chakras as de-sensitizing them. Some do this by grounding and becoming more aware of their environment around them. Others focus on visualising the chakras becoming smaller, working from the Crown to the Base, and this can be done by imagining the chakras as flower buds closing, or closing a door. Take care with the Solar Plexus Chakra as this is often a target for psychic attack and cording. Close it down and imagine a shield of light in front of it for extra protection. It is probably a good idea to always leave the Base Chakra open to assist in grounding.

Cleansing- Keep your body and your physical environment clean. This means letting go of negative thoughts which become toxic in the body and affects your auric field and chakra system. You will also find that cleaning up your diet and drinking plenty of fresh water goes a long way towards keeping your energy clean and strong.

Page 114: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 114

You can also clean each chakra individually by visualising in a meditation as you take a bright ball of light into each chakra and allow the colours to become clearer and brighter. In this way you may also detect tears or find emotional issues that need to be attended to.

You can also use the visualisation of a white tornado or vortex spinning around the room and the aura cleaning up anything that is no longer need. To clear your energy channel start above your crown moving down through the body and release it to the Earth.

Protection

The first thing to do is to make sure that your resonance is healthy, meaning whole and protected. That is your first duty--not to the other person, who is being destructive to themselves, to their environment, to everyone around them.

Reiki symbols work well- Symbol 1 for protection of people places and things, Symbol 2 for psychic protection. The Master Symbol can be used in place of any of the other symbols. It is you intention that matters. Other forms of protection might include imagining bubbles, shields, mirrors, cloaks, pyramids, rings of fire or salt. You can also use various symbols such as the crucifix, equal sided cross, the rank, the eye of Horus, the hand of Fatima, pentagram or pentacle, the star of David, tree of life or any other symbol that is meaningful to you. Many also use white lighting.

Another "protection" is called "the triple protection." This is a series of three etheric shields that allow only love to pass through from outside and back from you. You intend, visualize and feel-very close to your physical body--fine particles of sparkling gold energy fitting over your form. Next is a layer of fine, gold mesh, much like the chain mail worn by knights. Finally, you create a literal shield of gold as the third, outside layer of the triple protection. Other protections merely set up a barrier so that nothing penetrates either way. The triple protection lets your love come through to them and nothing but love to come back through to you.

Now this really is the answer to your question: Compassion comes from the heart, not from the solar plexus. It is very difficult for human beings to distinguish between true compassion and something that really is fear. The reason we say it is fear is that it really is pity and not compassion. With pity, you go out and put yourself in their place and you say to yourself: "Oh. This is what I would feel like if I were that person." This is so subtle and often quite an unconscious reaction. What you have done in that moment is to breathe-in that pity, and there your resonance changes.

True compassion doesn't reflect to self, doesn't come back to the consciousness of self and how self would feel if self were in that other situation. True compassion comes straight from here [indicating the heart]. It's a pure love. There's no thought process, there's no "becoming" that person for a moment, there's no "There but for the grace of God..." None of that is there. Whatever you experience at the heart level or above protects you. If you are experiencing from the lower chakras only--and we make an exception when all chakras are open and balanced--then your protection is gone.

If you go into the first chakra it's about physical survival and the need for power based on fear & controlling others. You open yourself up when you come from that place of fear. That is why some people seem to have problems with attached entities and others never do. Those who don't have these problems never talk about negative entities. Those who do have these problems talk about them all the time.

5 Layers of Protection

Imagine that there is a sun residing within you. Visualise the run’s rays shining out to fill your aura, and form a cocoon of protection, about a metre around you in all directions.

Let the sun’s rays begin to rotate so that it gives protection to very part of your aura, and in fact repairs and fills any holes or tears in your aura, strengthening it in all directions.

Page 115: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 115

Now 30cm outside the sun layer, imagine a mirror surrounding you, and let it to begin to rotate, in any direction you choose. This will reflect back negative energy, thoughts, intentions, cords, spells or anything unwanted, back to the person who sent it.

Next another layer, this one is 30cm outside the mirror layer, and is made of a multi-faceted diamond, so let it spin and rotate too, and as it does this, it will cut any cords and release you from other people’s hold.

Now I want you to think of a symbol that represents protection to you. Some use the Reiki Symbols, others may use a religious cross or anything that feels right for you. Send these symbols out in all directions to psychically intend that you are fully protected.

And the final layer of protection is to send swords flying out in all directions from you, to fill the room and beyond.

Remember that if there are any negative energies, ghosts, entities etc. in your vicinity, and they are looking for someone to attach, they will be more likely to go towards someone that is not protected.

You can also use the 5 Layers of Protection to protect your home, office or building any time you are feeling that there is a need.

Exercise to Raise Your Vibration

Negative energy vibrates at a slower rate. The more you raise and speed up your own vibration the lighter and finer your vibration becomes and the less likely you are to be affected by the heavier, slower energies.

Reiki Glossary With every area o f learning there is usually a vocabulary that is used by people in the system to more effectively communicate ideas, concepts practices, and to make the discussion of subjects in that topic easier to understand. Reiki is no different. For absolute beginners, different terms like "attunements", "symbols", "Usui your aura,Shiki Ryoho" may be confusing at first. This Glossary is an aid to assist you in understanding the many different concepts and practices in Reiki quickly.

A

Advanced Reiki Training - (also known as Level IIIa, Reiki Master Practitioner, or "Personal Mastery Level" in the Usui/Tibetan Systems) A collection of new age techniques and pseudo-Tibetan practices added to the Hayashi-Takata System of Reiki in the west. Advanced Reiki Training generally consists of Reiki Crystal Grids, a healing attunement, the Antahkarana symbol, Reiki Guide Meditation, Psychic Surgery, Reiki Symbol Meditation. Most closely associated with Raku Kai Reiki and William Rand's Usui Tibetan Reiki. Antahkarana Symbol - A symbol consisting of a cube shape with 7's on its face surfaces. Presumably of Tibetan origin although this cannot be determined. Claimed to have panacea type effects on all areas of healing. This is used in a specific meditation as well as on "master frequency generator plates" developed by Ralf Jensen. Attunements - Attunements are a technique common to all forms of Reiki in the west. They use a process of placing the Reiki Symbols and energy into the meridians, aura or energy body of the recipient of the attunement process. Some Attunement systems focus on placing the energy in the Chakras. Attunements empower people to use Reiki on themselves and others and facilitate a connection to the Reiki source.

B

Beaming - Beaming is a technique of distant healing. It is a "line of sight" distant Reiki sending to a person. Although a distant healing technique, this is generally done in the presence of another when hands on Reiki touch might be inappropriate (abuse cases, burn victims). Beaming is common to other healing systems such as in the Johrei Fellowship.

Page 116: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 116

Blood Exchange - The blood exchange is a Reiki method of cleansing the blood of toxins. It is thought that these practices stimulate the body to produce new blood cells and to stimulate the meridians effected. Breath of the Fire Dragon (See also "Violet Breath") - A special breathing technique used to place the Reiki symbol in the crown of the student during an attunement. It is also used in Raku Kai to develop the microcosmic orbit and strengthen the Reiki channel and promote health. Byosen (See Also "Scanning") - A process where the hands of the Reiki master move over the body of the recipient to determine if there are weaknesses, changes, or areas in need of treatment. There are various methods used. This is called Byosen Reikian ho in the Reiki ho practices in Japan.

C

Chakras - Chakras are energy vortices on the energy body that comprise part of the energy system. They are Indo-Tibetan in origin and were added to Reiki in the Raku Kai system of Reiki. They are currently commonly taught in many forms of Reiki. Chakras were not part of the Japanese Reiki Practices or Mrs. Takata's practices. Cho Ku Rei - The First Reiki Symbol. Cho Ku Rei is commonly called the "Power" symbol in the Western Styles of Reiki (Usui Shiki Ryoho) but is called "Focus" in Traditional Japanese Reiki and in Japan. Some meanings for the symbol might be "God is here", or "put the power here". Cleansing (21 day cleanse) - Cleansing (also "clearing") is a process of the body removing toxins and realigning the energy fields following a Reiki treatment or attunement. Some practitioners feel this process takes 21 days or can be so severe it can cause a "healing crisis". Many other practitioners feel that the reaction to attunements and treatments is individual and lasts as long as is necessary for the individual. Cleansing was taught in the original system but was seldom thought to last more than a day.

D

Dai Ko Myo or Dai Ko Mio - (also known as the Usui Master Symbol) The Dai Ko Myo is the Master symbol used in the all Reiki Systems. It is the symbol for the Ultimate Source of Love, Light, Harmony and Healing. It is sometimes translated to mean the "Great Shining Light". Distant Attunements - An Attunement that uses the Reiki Distant Symbol (Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen) to perform the attunement on someone not physically present. A logical extension of Reiki Distant Healing, and the Distant Symbol. Distant Healing - This is sending Reiki energy for the purpose of healing someone not physically present. This uses the Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen (Distant Symbol) and a variety of techniques such as the photo technique, Reiki stacks, healing lists, or teddy bear technique for a point of focus. Distant Symbol (See - Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen) - The Third Reiki Symbol. The Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen is a combination of Japanese Kanji (symbol language) that can mean "no past, no present, no future" which represents the timeless original purity of the source of all and the spirit of man. A translation might be "To act in the Realisation of Absolute Beingness" (Thanks to Gabriel Shivers for that definition). Dumo (also known as "Tibetan Master Symbol") - The Dumo is a "Tibetan" Symbol that is part of the William Rand Usui/Tibetan System as well as used by various Independent Reiki Masters including Diane Stein. This symbol is also referred to as the "Tibetan Dai Ko Mio". This symbol is thought to unify the body and mind. It is reported to work with fire in the base chakra by igniting the Sacred flame (i.e. the Kundalini energy). It is believed to pull negative energy and disease from the body and mind.

E

Empowerments - Any process to help another develop the ability to use an energy or technique. The Reiju technique was an empowerment used by Usui to pass the Reiki energy to others.

Page 117: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 117

Energy Exchanges - A new age concept often used to justify charging for Reiki training or treatments, particularly high fees. It appears to have been added onto the system in the western world after the Death of Mrs. Takata. The concept is that when one gives or trains another in Reiki, the person receiving must give to the Reiki teacher in order to keep the universe in balance.

F Fire Serpent (See Also Nin Giz Zida) - A "Tibetan" symbol used in the

Usui/Tibetan tradition. It is sometimes used instead of the Raku and is also used in Karuna Reiki. The Fire Serpent is thought to open the Chakra system. The Fire Serpent represents the "Sleeping Serpent" coiling at the base of the spine. The fire Serpent is used during an attunement with horizontal line over top of crown, snaking down the spine, and spiralling clockwise at base of spine; grounds energy into lower (feet to tailbone) body. By reversing the spiral (counter-clockwise) starting at base of spine, snaking up spine and ending with horizontal line over the crown; it pushes energy up to four upper chakras. It does not allow energy to escape out of crown chakra. The fire serpent connects and opens all chakras. It opens the central channel allowing the flow of Kundalini fire. It can be used in healing or meditation for more balance and receptivity.

G

Gakkai - The Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai was the original organisation that Mikao Usui founded which continues to practice and teach Reiki in an unbroken line since the passing of Mikao Usui. The Gakkai's practices are referred to as Reiki Ryoho, or "Reiho". The emphasis is more on a spiritual awakening and healing. The system takes longer to learn than its counterpart in the west. . Global Reiki Masters Association (GRMA) - The Global Reiki Masters Association (GRMA) is an International Association of Reiki Masters. The members are a diverse group, who respects all Reiki Practices. The GRMA tries to provide truthful information, training, and empowerment about Reiki. The GRMA is dedicated to spreading the Gift of Reiki throughout the world to all that need and wish to have the Gift of Reiki in their lives. Joseph “Running Wolf” founded the GRMA Sparti so that all who wish to learn Reiki are able to do so free of the control of others. The GRMA sponsors Free Worldwide Distant Master Attunements several times per year. These Singular Master Empowerments are performed by the membership of the GRMA.

H

Hand Positions - Hand positions refer to the specific hand positions used when performing a Reiki treatment. The Reiki practitioner places their hands on specified positions and lets the Reiki flow into the recipient's body at these points to facilitate healing. It appears that in Usui's Original Practices there were five positions and then he used Reji and Byosen to sense and scan for other locations to be treated. In Traditional Japanese Reiki, which is of the Hayashi line, there are seven positions. In the Hayashi-Takata line there are twelve. Other Reiki systems may use different numbers of positions. Hatsurei ho - This is a meditation and breathing technique that was used by Usui. It is still used in Reiki Ryoho as practiced by the Gakkai. It is a technique that empowers the practitioner by increasing and enhancing their Reiki channel and their connection to the Reiki source. It is also to help the practitioner grow spiritually. It includes a self-cleansing ritual as well as two different meditation practices. Hayashi (Chujiro Hayashi, Dr. Hayashi) - Dr. Chujiro Hayashi was made a Reiki Master in 1925 and was a student of Usui. Dr. Hayashi was a retired officer from the Japanese Navy. He opened a Reiki clinic, which was more along the lines of a medical model. Dr. Hayashi made some modifications in the system including a heavier emphasis on the symbols and attunements, and most likely developed the 12 standard hand positions from in use in the west today. These hand positions allowed Reiki to be given by several practitioners at once. This group healing technique was used in his clinic. He was the teacher of Hawayo Takata.

Page 118: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 118

Healing Attunements - A non-initiatory attunement technique thought to "increase healing" developed by William Rand. Although the procedure is thought to not initiate the recipient into Reiki as a practitioner, some masters have concern over using this procedure because they found that students retained the ability to do Reiki and had no training. Healing Crisis - A concept found in pranic healing and other healing approaches that some masters have added into Reiki. The concept of a healing crisis is that the recipient of a Reiki treatment or attunement experience a “release” and goes into an emotional or physical "crisis". The concept is not widely accepted by most masters. Hui Yin - An "energy cranking" technique used in attunements. It was added into Raku Kai Reiki and is part of William Rand's Usui/Tibetan practices and Diane Stein's Work. It is more commonly known in chi kung as the Microcosmic orbit. Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen - The Third Reiki Symbol The Hon Sha Ze Sho Nen is a combination of Japanese Kanji (symbol language) that can mean "no past, no present, no future" which represents the timeless original purity of the source of all and the spirit of man. A translation might be "To act in the Realisation of Absolute Beingness" (Thanks to Gabriel Shivers for that definition).

I Independent Reiki Masters - Independent Reiki Masters is a term used to describe people who are Reiki Masters that are not aligned with a particular school or approach. They might use an eclectic approach with techniques from many schools. The vast majority of Reiki Masters in the west are Independent Reiki Masters. Intent - Reiki is an Intent driven system. Intent is the key to using the Reiki energy in healing and attunements.

J

Johrei - Johrei is a religion or spiritual practice that was developed by Mokichi Okada, a contemporary of Mikao Usui. He founded Sei Kai Kyu Sei Kyo better known as Johrei and as

the Johrei Fellowship. Like Reiki, Johrei also uses Reiju to empower its followers. A "Johrei Reiki" was developed from Raku Kai Reiki using the White Light (Johrei) symbol as part of its practices and attunements. The name was changed to Vajra Reiki after some legal entanglements over the use of the word Johrei. The Fellowship maintains a website at www.Johrei.com.

K

Karuna Reiki - Karuna Reiki is a healing system founded by William Rand from his learning

new symbols and Kathleen Milner's healing system, which became Tera Mai Reiki and Seichem. It is claimed to be "higher frequency" that Usui Reiki. It was formerly known as Sai Baba Reiki but the name changed due to legal complications from using the Sai Baba name. The system is Trade Marked, controlled and regulated through the International Centre for Reiki

Studies in Michigan, USA. Karuna Ki - Karuna Ki is a Compassionate Heart Energy and Healing System developed by Vinny Amador from work with Tera Mai and Karuna. It shares common symbols with Karuna

Reiki and Tera Mai Reiki but adds many new meditations, mudras and other techniques. The system is based on the cultivation of the compassionate heart. Ki Ko - The name for Japanese Traditional Chi Kung (Qi Gong) Practices. Usui used many chi kung practices in the development of Reiki.

L

Levels in Reiki (See Also - Sho-den, Oku-den, Shinpi-den) - Reiki is traditionally taught in the West in three levels. Level I - Generally includes the Reiki Principles, the hand positions, Reiki History, and you receive the Reiki attunements. In traditional schools there are four attunements done at the first level. In other schools, including the Tibetan/Usui schools, there may be a combined level I attunement. Some schools teach that Reiki I heals on the physical level.

Page 119: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 119

Level II - Generally includes the three Reiki Symbols (Focus, Harmony, and Connection), Mental/Emotional Healing, Distant Healing, and another attunement. The Tibetan/Usui School adds the techniques scanning and beaming. Some schools teach Reiki II is "emotional healing". Level III (Master/Teacher Level) - Generally includes the Usui Master Symbol (empowerment symbol) and its meaning and application, The attunement process and practice in its application, and how to teach others. Some schools teach that Reiki III is for spiritual healing. Some traditions (the Usui/Tibetan Schools and other various Independent Practitioners) have added a Level IIIa in between Level II and the Master/Teacher Level. Level IIIa is often called Advanced Reiki Training (ART). Some of the techniques that might be included here are: *Reiki Meditation using the symbols, *Using the symbols for manifesting goals, *Reiki and crystals, *Making a Reiki crystal grid, *Reiki meditation to *Meet you "Reiki guide", Reiki Healing Attunement, the Tibetan Antahkarana symbol and a meditation for its use, the Hui Yin position and the Violet Breath.

M

Master Symbol (See Also Dai Ko Mio) - The Dai Ko Mio is the Master symbol used in the all Reiki Systems. It is the symbol for the Ultimate Source of Love, Light, Harmony and Healing. It is sometimes translated to mean the "Great Shining Light". Meditation - Any number of focusing, breathing, or contemplative methods designed to bring about a heightened state of consciousness and/or enlightenment. In Usui Reiki Ryoho the most important and prominent is the Hasturei ho. Various other western systems have added Reiki Meditations. Mental Emotional Symbol (See Also "Sei Hei Ki") - This is the second Reiki symbol. It is thought to help heal on the mental and emotional levels in the body. It is also called the "Harmony" symbol in Traditional Japanese Reiki. Mikao Usui - Developer of Reiki. Born August 15th, 1865 in the Yamagata district of Gifu prefecture in a village called Yago. Usui studied Buddhism at the school and temple on Mt. Kurama as a child. It is also thought that he may have studied a Japanese form of Chi Kung called Ki Ko and other oriental healing systems.

N

Nin Giz Zida (See Also Fire Serpent) - A "Tibetan" symbol used in the Usui/Tibetan tradition. The Fire Serpent represents the "Sleeping Serpent" coiling at the base of the spine. The fire Serpent is used during an attunement with horizontal line over top of crown, snaking down the spine, and spiralling clockwise at base of spine; grounds energy into lower (feet to tailbone) body. By reversing the spiral (counter-clockwise) starting at base of spine, snaking up spine and ending with horizontal line over the crown; it pushes energy up to four upper chakras. It does not allow energy to escape out of crown chakra. The fire serpent connects and opens all chakras. It opens the central channel allowing the flow of Kundalini fire. It can be used in healing or meditation for more balance and receptivity. Non-Traditional Reiki - Reiki in the Hayashi-Takata (Usui Shiki Ryoho Tradition) that has been modified in some way. This might include distant attunements, additions of crystals, Angels, other symbols, different attunements, and other things. The masters are generally Independent Reiki Masters.

O

Oku-den - The Second Teachings in Reiki Ryoho in Japan. It consists of two parts, which are Oku den Zenki, and Oku den Kouki. These levels include Hatsurei ho, the hand techniques of Ushi te, Oshi te, and Nade te, Sei Hei Ki Chiryou, and Enkaku Chiryou (distant treatment), as well as the blood exchanges.

P

Power Symbol (See Also "Cho Ku Rei") - The First Reiki Symbol. Cho Ku Rei is commonly called the "Power" symbol in the Western Styles of Reiki (Usui Shiki Ryoho) but is called "Focus" in Traditional Japanese Reiki and in Japan. Some meanings for the symbol might be

Page 120: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 120

"God is here".

R

Raku - A lightening-like symbol that is used at the end of attunements to separate the energies of the Master and student. Most commonly used in the Usui/Tibetan and Raku Kai Traditions. Raku Kai Reiki - A system of Reiki developed by Arthur Robertson. Arthur Robertson was a student of Iris Ishikuro (one of Takata's 22 masters). The system incorporated Ralf Jensen's Master Frequency Generator Plates, The "Tibetan" practices of the Hui Yin, and Breath of the Fire Dragon (i.e. Violet Breath), the Tibetan Symbols (Raku, Dumo, and the Fire Serpent), the O Sui CHing Water Ritual, and Iris Ishikuro's use of the White Light Symbol (Johrei). This school has influenced or led to the development of the Usui/Tibetan Schools, Vajra Reiki, as well as

Karuna Reiki and Tera Mai Reiki.

Radiance Technique- A school of Reiki developed by Barbara Weber Ray, who was one of Takata's 22 Masters. Barbara claimed that she had information from Takata that was not given

to the other masters. This school has also been known as Real Reiki It originally had only three levels, but currently has six. Reiho - A shortened name for Reiki Ryoho or Reiki ho. It refers to practices and the system used in the Usui Reiki Ryoho Gakkai. Reiji - Reiji is the ability to find or spot imbalances in the body. It develops naturally as you practice Reiki. Consistent practice in healing others leads to the ability to be guided to the cause of the recipient's problem. This knowledge will be known even before scanning the person's body Reiki - Reiki (pronounced Ray-Key) is a system of Enlightenment and a Hands on Healing art developed in the early 1900's by Mikao Usui in Japan. It is an art that is passed from Master to student. The word Reiki comes from two Japanese words - Rei and Ki, meaning universal life energy. The term "Reiki" is used to describe both the energy and the Usui system of using it. The original system by Usui was called Usui Reiki Ryoho. There are many variant's of Reiki being practiced these days. Included in this list might be: Usui Shiki Ryoho, "Traditional Reiki" of the Takata-Furumoto line as practiced in America, Traditional Japanese Reiki developed from Hayashi's students in Japan and practiced in Canada, Various Non-Traditional Reiki Styles practiced by Independent Reiki Masters, Usui-Tibetan Reiki, Tibetan-Usui Reiki, Raku Kai Reiki, Tera Mai(tm) Reiki, Angelic Reiki and many others. Reiju - The original empowerment used by Mikao Usui to pass on the Reiki energy. Reiju developed into the Attunements that are used in Usui Shiki Ryoho and in all western Reiki systems. Reiki Alliance - An organisation formed in the Western World by Mrs. Takata's 22 masters following her death. The organisation was formed by Mrs. Takata's granddaughter, Mrs. Phyllis Furumoto. The Alliance claims to represent "Traditional" Reiki. Its practices represent the Hayashi-Takata lineage. Mrs. Furumoto went from forming the Alliance to calling herself "Grandmaster" of Reiki and lately the "Spiritual" Lineage holder. The Alliance maintains a requirement that the master level should cost Ten Thousand Dollars. An attempt was made by the Alliance in 1997 to trademark the name "Reiki" and Usui Shiki Ryoho which failed in most countries. Reiki Circle - A group Reiki practice where Reiki is shared. Reiki Crystal Grids - A technique that charges crystals with Reiki and then places them in a geometric design. The purpose is to create a protective grid or to use it to send continuous healing. It is most commonly taught in the Usui/Tibetan Schools, and is a part of the Level IIIa curriculum. It is an add-on technique to the system in the Western Reiki practices. Reiki Ethics - A set of guidelines for the personal and professional conduct of Reiki practitioners. An example might be not sending distant Reiki without permission. These vary from Master to Master and School to School. Reiki Guides - A belief that there are specific "guides" or spirits that work with Reiki and individual practitioners. Some refer to these as "Ascendant Masters", "Spirits", or "Guides". The belief in them varies to beings that help with Reiki to beliefs like Diane Stein's that the Reiki

Page 121: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 121

Guides do the attunements and facilitate treatments. This is an add-on to the system in the western world that was popularised by Diane Stein in her book "Essential Reiki" and is taught as part of William Rand's Level IIIa class. Reiki History - The stories of Mikao Usui and the development of Reiki. There are several versions from the Christianised version told by Mrs Takata that is used in the Reiki Alliance to the historically accurate version that you can find in books like Frank Arjava Petter's "Reiki Fire". Most generally contain the thematic elements of Mikao Usui searching for a system of healing, meditating on Mt. Kurama, becoming enlightened, discovering he could heal, and starting a school to teach others to heal themselves. Reiki Master - The original term for a Reiki Teacher in the Western World in the Usui Shiki Ryoho Tradition. Reiki Master Practitioner - A recent term used to describe people who have taken the Level IIIa or "Personal Mastery" classes that some Masters offer. Generally these people have received the Reiki Master attunement but are not given the Level III Master symbols or instructions for attuning others. This term is common in the Usui/Tibetan Traditions. Reiki Master Teacher - A term in for Masters in schools that have a Level IIIa and Level IIIb dichotomy. It refers to those that have completed the Level IIIb and know the Reiki master symbols and how to attune others. This term is common in the Usui/Tibetan Traditions. Reiki Principles - A series of five principles written by the Meiji Emperor and used by Usui in Reiki Ryoho. There are many different sets of these. These are designed to help empower the student and to bring about an awakened mental and spiritual state. The most accurate translation might be, "The Secret Method of Inviting Blessings, The spiritual Medicine of Many Illnesses, For today only do not anger, do not worry. Be Grateful and Do your work with appreciation. Be kind to all living things. In the morning and at night, with hands held in prayer, Think this in your mind, chant this with your mouth. Reiki Stacks - A technique used for sending distant Reiki. The recipients and inanimate objects or situations that are to receive Reiki are placed on a list. Reiki is send to all on the list. Users of the technique are warned by its developer, Reiki Master Anthony Glenn Agee, to not make the stack more than 10 people because he believes the energy multiplies or increases the higher you go up the list. (Other Masters do not find this to be the case). It is believed that you can "save" stacks to use at a later time. Reiki Treatment - Receiving Reiki from a Reiki practitioner for the intent and purpose of healing. It generally consists of a practitioner placing their hands on various hand positions on the recipient's body and takes about 35 to 60 minutes in person. It can also refer to distant Reiki treatment.

S

Scanning (See Also "Byosen") - A process where the hands of the Reiki master move over the body of the recipient to determine if there are weaknesses, changes, or areas in need of treatment. There are various methods used. This is called Byosen Reikian ho in the Reiki ho practices in Japan. Patrick Ziegler discovered Seichim Reiki - Seichim in 1980 after a spiritual experience in the Great Pyramid in Egypt and after receiving Sufi Empowerments from a Sufi Master. The Seichim Reiki (also known as Renegade Reiki) system was developed by T'Om Seaman, Ken Lowry, and Phoenix Summerfield. SKHM - The current practice of Seichim by Patrick Ziegler. It is an empowerment type system that utilises a connection to the SKHM energy source and earth mixed together in the heart. It uses "emotional release" as part of the process and as an indication that a connection has been made. It is very similar to Druidic practices such as the Twin Powers Meditation taught in some Druid Schools. Sei Hei Ki (See Also - Mental/Emotional Symbol) - This is the second Reiki symbol. It is thought to help heal on the mental and emotional levels in the body. It is also called the "Harmony" symbol in Traditional Japanese Reiki. Shoden - The First Teachings in Reiki Ryoho as taught in the Gakkai in Japan. It generally consists of The five principles, basics of using the system, The Waka Poetry of the Meiji

Page 122: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 122

Emperor, the hand positions, and Excerpts from the Handbook of Reiki Treatment (to guide treatment), and Questions and Answers from Usui. Shinpi den - The fourth teaching or "Mystery Teachings" in the Usui Reiki Ryoho practices in Japan. It consisted of Kouketsu ho, Breathing out method (healing with the breath), The Reiki Group Treatment, Healing by sending a thought or wish, the Reiki Circle, and how to perform Reiju or the empowerment.

T

Takata (Mrs. Hawayo Takata) - A student of Chujiro Hayashi and the first Reiki Master to be allowed to teach Reiki in the western world. She is the person most responsible for the spread of Reiki in the west today. Most western lineages come from Mrs. Takata.

Tera Mai Reiki - A school of Reiki developed by Kathleen Milner. This school draws from the Raku Kai Reiki line, and also adds a number of "channelled" symbols and procedures that Kathleen believes a "higher" being gave her on the "inner planes". Tibetan Reiki - A school of Reiki that believes to have found the original practices from Tibet. There are a number of additional levels as well as a number of different symbols that are a mix of Sanskrit and Japanese Kanji. Tibetan Reiki is also used generically to describe Usui/Tibetan and Tibetan/Usui Reiki. Tibetan Master Symbol (See Also "Dumo") - The Dumo is a "Tibetan" Symbol that is part of the William Rand Usui/Tibetan System as well as used by various Independent Reiki Masters including Diane Stein. This symbol is also referred to as the "Tibetan Dai Ko Mio". This symbol is thought to unify the body and mind. It is reported to work with fire in the base chakra by igniting the Sacred flame (i.e. the Kundalini energy). It is believed to pull negative energy and disease from the body and mind. Traditional Japanese Reiki - A school of Reiki developed by Dave King in Canada. Traditional Japanese Reiki was developed from information from the Hayashi line in Japan that does not include the Takata lineage. It was developed and is practiced in the west. Traditional Reiki - This term generally refers to the practices of the Reiki Alliance and those that follow closely the Takata lineage.

U

Usui Shiki Ryoho - This refers to Reiki of the Hayashi lineage. This can include Reiki in the Hayashi-Takata Lineage. It is the most common practice of Reiki in the western world. This system uses attunements and a heavy reliance on the Reiki symbols. Usui Reiki Hikkei - This is the Usui Reiki Handbook that Mikao Usui gave to his students. It contained four Parts. Part one was the "Teachings of Usui Reiki Ryoho". Part two was an "Explanation of Instruction for the Public". Part three was the Ryoho Shishon or "Method of Healing Guide. Part four was the Meiji Renno Gyosei or "Poems of the Meiji Emperor". Usui Reiki Ryoho - This refers to the practice of Reiki as Usui practiced it and as it is still practiced in Japan in a unbroken line since Usui. This system uses meditations, such as hatsurei ho, and other practices so the person can develop spiritually and heal. Empowerments such as Reiju are used (rather than attunements) to help the student clear the channels and to help pass on the Reiki energy. Usui/Tibetan Reiki - A school of Reiki that built on the work of Arthur Robertson's Raku Kai Reiki. It has four levels being Level I, Level II, Level IIIa, and Level IIIb. The system added a number of techniques such as using crystals, guides, healing attunements, as well as various "Tibetan" symbols. This system was made popular by William Rand and Diane Stein.

V

Vajra Reiki (See also Johrei) - A system of Reiki that uses some of the Tibetan Material as well as the White Light (Johrei) symbol. Violet Breath (See also "Breath of the Fire Dragon") - A special breathing technique used to place the Reiki symbol in the crown of the student during an attunement. It is also used in Raku Kai to develop the microcosmic orbit and strengthen the Reiki channel and promote health.

Page 123: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 123

Page 124: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 124

Sensei Mikao Usui

Page 125: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 125

Sensei Mikao Usui

Page 126: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 126

Dr Chujiro Hayashi

Page 127: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 127

Mrs Hawayo Takata

Page 128: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 128

Certificates given to Barbara Ray Weber from Mrs Takata

Page 129: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 129

The following is a letter sent to Barbara Ray Weber from Hawayo Takata:

Page 130: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 130

Page 131: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 131

Page 132: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 132

Page 133: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 133

Page 134: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 134

Page 135: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 135

Page 136: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 136

The Meridians In Traditional Chinese Medicine, and modalities such as Accupuncture and Touch For Health Kinesiology there are 14 main eneregy meridians which carry the Chi or Ki around the body to the different organs and parts of the body. Thes can be tested to find blockages in specific meridians which can be cleared to promote better health. We can also test these meridians using Muscle Monitoring Accupuncture and Accupressure points can be found along these meridians. This is beyond the scope of Reiki but can be very useful. CV = Conception Vessel or Central Chanel GV = Govenor Chanel ST = Stomach SP = Spleen H = Hearet SI = Small Intestine BL = Bladder KI = Kidney CX = Circulation Sex TW = Triple Warmer GB = Gall Bladder LV = Liver LU = Lung LI = Large Intestine

Page 137: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 137

Page 138: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 138

Page 139: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 139

Raising your Vibration is the key to maintaining good health!

Page 140: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 140

Page 141: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 141

One of Mikao Usui’s Classes

One of Chujiro Hyashi’s Classes

Page 142: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 142

One of Hawayo Takata’s Seminars

Page 143: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 143

Page 144: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 144

Page 145: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 145

My Reiki Masters

Page 146: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 146

Carol with Zetta Michaels - Reiki Level 2

My Reiki Master

Merilyn Bretherick & friend Peter

My other Reiki & Seichim Master Teacher

Zetta Michaels Merilyn Bretherick Carol Macrae

The Usui family plot is about 10' by 12' and holds 3 monuments on it.

The smaller 2 monuments serve as grave markers. The larger of the 2 marks the remains of Mikao Usui

and his wife. It was placed here by his son Fuji, one year after Usui-

san's death.

The largest of the 3 markers is a tribute to Mikao Usui by the Reiki society that he founded. It was placed here in February 1927, a month before the grave marker.

Page 147: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 147

Page 148: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 148

Page 149: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 149

My Dear Reiki Student and Friend,

Congratulations! You are now officially a Reiki and Seichim Master, and can therefore help to bring this wonderful healing energy to others.

To commence your Reiki Master training you must have mastered most of the major issues of your life, or at least be aware of them, and know what direction you are moving in.

A Reiki Master is someone who leads by example, does not make judgement upon themself or others, yet takes full responsibility for their own life. They release the ego, and know that they are no better or worse than anyone else.

A Reiki Master genuinely cares about others, looking into their heart and treating people with kindness, compassion, friendship, support and love, yet not allowing others to manipulate or control them. They look for the highest good in others, and don’t presume they have all the answers, or try to second-guess GOD.

In times of turmoil they choose Love over being right! They also know how important it is to take time to nurture their own needs, and put themselves first when necessary. To love themselves, then to share that love with others.

A Reiki Master looks at situations with greater detachment and learns the lessons of this lifetime.

YET, we are all a beautiful painting, a work in progress, we are all human, simply striving to do our best with what we have, and help others on their journey. So we are all at least taking steps to become all that we are meant to be. That which we already are!

Take time every day to re-assess your goals and where you are on your journey, and connect back with your Spirit. Listen to that small quiet voice, and allow your Reiki and Seichim to assist you in all areas of you life!

From Usui and a succession of wonderful Masters, this Universal Life Energy has come to you! How lucky we are to have been chosen! To be in the right place at the right time!

I would like to take this opportunity to thank my past Reiki Masters:

Zetta Michaels from Byron Bay, who leads her life as an example of loving kindness, and to me embodied the Spirit of Reiki. Merilyn Bretherick from Broken Hill, who taught me some major lessons in what I wanted to become as a Reiki Master, and where I was really going with my life. Thank you both for these lessons in my life’s journey.

Every time we overcome a challenge, which of course is an opportunity to learn more about ourself and our soul, we are given another. That’s how it works. So I would like to thank God for my most important lesson to date with breast cancer in August 2005. I was reminded that we must never lose touch of our own needs as humans, or get too busy trying to help everyone else, to forget to put our own needs first. I know this was a MAJOR lesson for me and for most healers, so beware.

Remember, first God or the Universe first gives you a tap on the shoulder, then he gives you a punch in the arm, and then if you don’t listen to what your soul needs to hear, he kicks your legs

Suite 21, 69-79 Macquarie St, Dubbo, NSW, 2830 Ph: 0413346637 E: [email protected] W:

www.carolmacrae.com

Page 150: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 150

out from under you! I got the kick, and I knew exactly what I was meant to do, and to some extent I am always working on that one, but I AM learning to say no and put myself first! This has been one of my obstacle to overcome this lifetime.

After I had breast cancer I realised that it was in fact a gift, to teach me to really ask myself “what do I really want for my life?” I knew I’d been helping my husband live his dreams, owning and operating gyms for over 20 years, but in fact I was a nurse by choice, and a healer at heart. I knew we’d have to sell our gym and I’d have to move towards fulfilling my life’s purpose, so 2 years later we sold Chizen, but to help out I continued to teach yoga and pilates. 12 months later I developed a “hot spot” on my rib just below the wound site. A year later Oncology told me that it was breast cancer and suggested that I have a bone biopsy and chemotherapy. They told me that bone cancer wasn’t curable, but that the chemotherapy would at least be able to manage and contain it.

I had been working on the ‘hot spot” with Reiki, meditation and self-hypnosis, so by the time they had diagnosed it after many bone scans, I felt that I was already making some progress and said to them “that may be your opinion, but I don’t have to agree with you... I think I’m on top of it.” I knew that the symptoms had reduced, so they agreed to let me monitor it, and after 6 months more I knew I was certainly improving. Twelve months after that diagnosis I had another bone scan on April 14th, 2010, and the radiologist said “I can’t find that thing on your rib.”

I walked in to Oncology and he had to agree, after looking at all the scans twice, that indeed I was cured, and that he didn’t want to see me again. The feeling was mutual! So I know in my heart that we can do ANYTHING and with the help of Reiki, I was able to change my mind and heal my life. I know I also had many of my students sending Reiki, so I would sincerely like to thank them for their help, love and assistance.

From there I continued to evolve and follow my dreams into Hypnotherapy and 5-PATH Hypnosis, as well as my Reiki practice, which has continued to grow and change lives.

Unfortunately I found myself beginning to do 10 to 12 hour days in my business, as well as trying to juggle family, raising our grandson and dealing with our daughter who had her own personal problems, when again, in August 2014 I was diagnosed with breast cancer in the same breast as I’d had previously, on the left side. Because there was so much going on, I didn’t feel I could get the space to get my head in the right place to get rid of it myself, so I opted for a bilateral mastectomy and reconstruction using the DIEP process, which meant a 10 hour operation with 5 surgeons. This also meant they would use stomach fat, (basically like a tummy tuck, but also taking some of the blood supply from the abdominal muscles) to rebuild the breasts, but I would never be able to get breast cancer again or have to have mammograms or ultrasounds, because stomach fat is not susceptible to hormones, which had fed my cancer. So on Friday, October 17th, 2014 I had my operation at Hunters Hill Private Hospital, and apparently recovered better than any patient they have ever had, with only Panadol required for the discomfort. Thank goodness I had my Reiki, Self-Hypnosis and Meditation. I also ended up doing Hypnosis on 2 of the staff, so the Universe works in mysterious ways. 6 weeks later I was back in Sydney at St Vincent’s Hospital to have a skin graft because the Left Breast skin had a necrosis and became infected, so again I had a 2 week holiday, but was up wandering to Darlinghurst for an ice cream or for lunch with my son in Oxford St, and I also met some amazing people, including a nurse who will come to do her Reiki Master’s Training with me in the future, and a lady from Wagga, whose husband was in hospital. Hel died a 6 months later and I was blessed to be able to help her through this time in her life, and she continues to be one of my friends to this day.

Life is full of surprises and lessons, and we never stop learning. Our challenge is to stay open, and look at how every event or obstacle can be an opportunity to evolve and grow to become more of who we are meant to be.

Page 151: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 151

I would like to thank YOU for being a part of my Reiki Family, and allowing me to be a part of your life and share my life stories and my life’s work with you. We often teach the things we most need to learn, so be ever mindful that within us we hold the answers to all of our own problems. Just look inside, connect to your soul, your God-like nature and trust yourself! If your decisions come from fear, then re-think them, but if they come from Love then trust them, because those feelings come from a higher place.

You have mastered Level 1 and Level 2 Reiki, and are now at the doorway to your future. I urge you to take a leap of faith, and jump into the void! Jump to your destiny as a Reiki and Seichim Healer and Master, and help heal this world, but always remember that your world starts with YOU!

Thank you for the opportunity to assist you and be part of your journey into personal mastery. It is an honour and a pleasure!

Reiki has been instrumental in giving my life a whole new meaning… of helping to find my way, to reach inside and find out who I am. It has helped me heal my life and overcome adversity along the way, giving me renewed strength, courage and faith. Without it I may not be here today.

Reiki has helped me to see others in a different light, learning patience, kindness, compassion and forgiveness. And knowing that I can help others on their journey has made an enormous impact on my life, and made me a better person. Seichim has been another tool to use on that path. I now KNOW that I have a purpose.

You too have a purpose! We have travelled these first few footsteps together, and our lives will continue to be entwined, until we have done what we’ve come here to do together.

I feel privileged to be your Reiki Master, proud to call you my student and friend, and honoured to have you as a colleague who is now empowered to help change the lives of others in a positive way.

Reiki is unconditional love, appreciation of life, love and beauty within and around you, communication, awareness, awe and thanksgiving for God and his miracles.

I am sure that becoming a Reiki and Seichim Master will give you a quantum leap forward toward self-discovery, helping to open all doors which have been closed until now.

I hope too that you will in time also become a Teacher and help spread Reiki to every corner of the World. Use these tools with love to create you dream!

Welcome to our Reiki Circle. I honour the Healer within You!

Love and Reiki Blessings,

Carol Macrae Reiki and Seichim Master and Teacher Clinical & 5-PATH Hypnotherapist Touch Fort Health Kinesiology doTERRA Wellness Advocate

Page 152: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 152

Bibliography & Suggested Reading Reiki ~ Healing and Harmony through the Hands.- Tanmaya Honervoght

The Original Reiki Handbook of Dr. Mikao Usui - Mikao Usui & Frank Arjava Petter

The Hyashi Reiki Manual - Frank Arjava Petter, Tadao Yamaguchi, Chujiro Hayashi

Living Reiki, Takata’s Teachings – Fran Brown

Reiki, The Healing Touch - First and Second Degree Manual – William Lee Rand

Reiki Master Manual - William Lee Rand

Iyasino Gendai Reiki-ho - Modern Reiki Method for Healing - Hiroshi Doi

Essential Reiki – Dianne Stein

Reiki ~ The Legacy of Dr. Usui - Frank Arjava Petter

The Complete Reiki Handbook - Walter Lubeck

Rainbow Reiki - Walter Lubeck

Reiki Healer - Lawrence Ellyard

Reiki A Torch in Daylight - Karen K Mitchell, N.D., Ph.D.

Reiki Beyond the Usui System - Karen K Mitchell, N.D., Ph.D.

Reiki Mystery School - Karen K Mitchell, N.D., Ph.D.

Various Internet Sights such as these and more:

http://www.reiki.org/ , http://angelreiki.nu/reiki/ , http://www.geocities.com/HotSprings/9434/articles.html

http://usui-reiki.org/contents.htm, http://www.geocities.com/HotSprings/9434/la.html

http://www.threshold.ca/reiki/Usui_Reiki_Ryoho_Gakkai.html

Spirit Release – Sue Allen

Spirit Releasement Therapy – William J. Baldwin, DDS. Ph.D.

I leave you with some words of wisdom from an old Zen proverb:

Before enlightenment

chopping wood, carrying water

After enlightenment

chopping wood, carrying water!

Page 153: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 153

USUI REIKI ATTUNEMENT PROCESS ~ REIKI LEVEL 1 From the Front Introduction, then they close their eyes, etc. Call your energy in, invocation. Move to the Back

• With the dominant hand, draw the Dai Ko Myo over the Crown of the recipient's head.

• Tap the shoulder. Reach over and take hands in Gassho.

Gently blow the Master Symbol into the Crown Chakra, then guide the energy down through the crown and the spinal column.

First Attunement

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei, and guide down through to the base of the spine.

Second and Third Attunements

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei and the Sei Hei Ki, and guide down the spinal column, one at a time.

Forth Attunement

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki and Hon Sha Zei Sho, and guide down the spinal column, one at a time.

Move to the Front

Bring hands in circle to your HEART level, draw 4 SYMBOLS over the hands

• Visualise the Master Symbol in violet and lightly BLOW, from the base to the crown.

• Lift hands to THROAT level. Draw all of the 4 SYMBOLS over the hands.

• Visualise the Master Symbol in violet and lightly BLOW, from the base to the crown.

• Bring hands forward and gently open palms like a book.

• Draw Cho Ku Rei over palm. Slap into palm three times. Repeat with other hand.

• Place their hands in prayer position again at chest height, then raise to level of the FOREHEAD (3rd Eye). Draw Dai-Ko Myo & seal into finger tips. BLOW through the chakras once more.

• Give back their hands.

Move to the Back

• Seal the Aura with the Cho Ku Rei, leaving the crown open, step out of Aura.

• Sign with the Raku if you wish, to separate the aura.

Move to the Front and allow students to open eyes.

Page 154: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 154

USUI REIKI ATTUNEMENT PROCESS ~ REIKI LEVEL 2 BOTH ATTUNEMENTS From the Front Introduction Move to the Back

• With the dominant hand, draw the Dai Ko Myo over the Crown of the recipient's head.

• Tap the shoulder. Reach over and take hands on Gassho.

• Gently blow the Master Symbol into the Crown Chakra, then guide the energy down through the crown and the spinal column.

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki and Hon Sha Zei Sho, and guide down the spinal column, one at a time.

Move to the Front

Bring hands in circle to your HEART level, draw 4 SYMBOLS over the hands

• Visualise the Master Symbol in violet and lightly BLOW, from the base to the crown.

• Lift hands to THROAT level. Draw the Master Symbol then 3 SYMBOLS over the hands.

• Visualise the Master Symbol in violet and lightly BLOW, from the base to the crown.

• Bring hands forward and gently open palms like a book.

• Draw 3 SYMBOLS over palm. Slap into palm three times. Repeat with other hand.

• Place their hands in prayer position again at chest height, then raise to level of the FOREHEAD (3rd Eye). Draw Dai-Ko Myo & seal into finger tips. BLOW through the chakras once more.

• Give back their hands.

Move to the Back

• Seal the Aura with the Cho Ku Rei, leaving the crown open, step out of Aura.

• Sign with the Raku if you wish, to separate the aura.

Move to the Front and allow students to open eyes.

Page 155: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 155

USUI REIKI ATTUNEMENT PROCESS ~ REIKI 3 MASTER FIRST ATTUNEMENT. (OPTIONAL) Repeat final Attunement from Level 1 and final Attunement from Level 2 SECOND ATTUNEMENT From the Front Introduction Move to the Back

• With the dominant hand, draw the Dai Ko Myo over the Crown of the recipient's head.

• Tap the shoulder. Reach over and take hands on Gassho.

• Gently blow the Master Symbol into the Crown Chakra, then guide the energy down through the crown and the spinal column.

• Draw the Cho Ku Rei, Sei Hei Ki, Hon Sha Zei Sho,

and Dai Ko Myo and guide down the spinal column, one at a time. You may add the Raku if you wish.

Move to the Front

Bring hands in circle to your HEART level, draw 4 SYMBOLS over the hands

• Visualise the Master Symbol in violet and lightly BLOW, from the base to the crown.

• Lift hands to THROAT level. Draw the all of the 4 SYMBOLS over the hands.

• Visualise the Master Symbol in violet and lightly BLOW, from the base to the crown.

• Bring hands forward and gently open palms like a book.

• Draw 4 SYMBOLS over palm. Slap into palm three times. Repeat with other hand. You may add the Raku if you wish.

• Place their hands in prayer position again at chest height, then raise to level of the FROEHEAD (3rd Eye). Draw Dai-Ko Myo & seal into finger tips. BLOW through the chakras once more.

• Give back their hands.

Move to the Back

• Seal the Aura with the Cho Ku Rei, leaving the crown open, step out of Aura

• Sign with the Raku if you wish to separate the aura.

Move to the Front and allow students to open eyes.

Page 156: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 156

Cho Ku Rei (Cho koo ray)

Symbol No 1. The Power Symbol- “ Put all the Power of the Universe here”

Page 157: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 157

Sei He Ki (Sir hay key)

Symbol No 2. The Mental Emotional Symbol- “God and Humanity Become One”

Page 158: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 158

Hon Sha Zei Sho Nen (Hon sha zay show nen)

Symbol No 3. The Distance Healing Symbol- “The Buddha in me reaches out to the Buddha in you

to promote enlightenment and peace”

Page 159: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 159

Dai Ko Myo “Great Shining Light”

Empowerment, Intuition, Creativity & Spiritual connection

Dai Ko Myo

Page 160: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 160

Dai Ko Myo “Great Shining Light”

Empowerment, Intuition, Creativity & Spiritual connection

Page 161: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 161

Raku

Page 162: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 162

My Reiki Master Students

Toni Sabey Tina Dametto Glenn Fearnside Renae Cobley Leonie Cahill 9/7/1999 9/7/1999 19/8/2001 11/11/2001 attuned18/4/2002

W/shop 14/12/2008

Patricia Wilson Irene Dennis Roselyn Druce Caroline Edwards Marea Power 9th November 2003

Nikki Klenthis Wilma Willis Dennis Sunderland Nicole Hull Prue Duffy 9th November 2003

Elizabeth Whalebone Wendy Foster Leonie Watson Rae Ayling 11th February 2005 22nd August, 2004

(19)

Page 163: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 163

My Reiki Master Students Continued…

Giuliana Ryan Kate Donnelly Kylie O’Leary Tessa Wilson Jennifer McKinstry

19th November, 2006

Ruth Owers Geoffrey Melville

11th January, 2007

Kym Coon Charmaine Seton Leonie Cahill (refresh) Wendy Foster (refresh)

14th December, 2008

Kathryn Brady Geraldine Southern Val Coon Sharon Carroll Deanne Jenkins Margaret Broome

23rd August, 2010

Charmaine Jones Erin Campton Melissa Singh Donna Melville

Page 164: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 164

8th December, 2013 (38)

My Reiki Master Students Continued…

Carol (Ann) Ballard Scott Grube Berenice Hutchinson Nicole Horder (Refresher)

10th & 11th May, 2014

Leah Josephson Christine Jentjens Tamara Tagg Karen Martin

9th & 10th May, 2015

Matthew Puls Tracy Brennan Rachel Hobden Matthew Barry

9th & 10th May, 2015

Heather Knight Jenny Manns Marie Johnson

Joan Coddington Andrea Cook Debbie Camp

31st Oct & 1st Nov, 2015

Page 165: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 165

My Reiki Master Students Continued…

Felicity Newton Rochelle Olsen Karen McLauchlan Natalie Majewski

14th & 15th May, 2016 (60)

Jeanette Reid 12th October, 2017

Brigid Keary Bradley Holmes Samantha Thornton Tanya Bower Ann Ballard (Refresher) Ruth Owers (Refresher)

3rd December 2017

Rachel Kirsop Natasha Heller Carmel O’Shannessy Hannah Tom Ann Ballard (Ref)

November 25th, 2018

Scott Forsyth Sue Ham Gerri Southern (Refresher) Jesse Gerhard Ann Ballard (Refresher)

November 24th, 2019 December 14th & 15th

(72)

Page 166: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 166

My Reiki Master Students Continued…

Melissa Armstrong Niki Thomson Julie Hanrahan Roslyn Alexander

Ann Ballard (Refresher) Leonie Cahill (Refresher) Sharon Carroll (Refresher)

November 21st & 22nd, 2020 (76)

Page 167: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 167

Page 168: USUI SHIKI RYOHOReiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 5 Usui Shiki Ryoho Level 3 - Shinpi Den Course Outline 4 Developing Your Reiki Practice 52 Title Page and Original Precepts

Reiki Master’s Manual by Carol Macrae ©1999 168

Notes